Tundra (2004) - Automotive TOYOTA - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Full-size pickup truck
Model Year	2004
Engine Options	4.0L V6 (236 hp) or 4.7L V8 (240 hp)
Transmission	4-speed automatic or 5-speed manual (V6)
Drivetrain	Rear-wheel drive or part-time 4-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Regular unleaded gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity	26.4 gallons (100 L)
Towing Capacity	Up to 7,100 lbs (3,221 kg) with V8
Payload Capacity	Up to 1,550 lbs (703 kg)
Overall Length	217.5 in (5,524 mm)
Overall Width	79.3 in (2,014 mm)
Overall Height	75.6 in (1,920 mm) (4x2) / 76.4 in (1,940 mm) (4x4)
Wheelbase	128.3 in (3,259 mm)
Curb Weight	4,200 - 4,600 lbs (1,905 - 2,086 kg) approx.
Seating Capacity	3 (regular cab) or 5/6 (Access Cab)
Safety Features	Dual front airbags, ABS, side-impact door beams
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 5,000 miles or 6 months
Tire Pressure (Front/Rear)	32 psi (220 kPa) / 35 psi (240 kPa) (check label)
Spare Tire Location	Under the rear of the truck bed

Frequently Asked Questions - Tundra (2004) TOYOTA

What type of oil does the 2004 Toyota Tundra use?

The recommended engine oil is 5W-30 or 10W-30, API Service SL or higher. Use about 6.1 quarts (5.8 L) with filter change.

What is the towing capacity of the 2004 Tundra with the V8?

With the 4.7L V8 and towing package, the maximum towing capacity is 7,100 lbs (3,221 kg). Without the package, it is lower. Always check your specific configuration.

How do I reset the maintenance light on a 2004 Tundra?

Turn the ignition to ON (not START). Press and hold the trip meter reset button until the light turns off (about 5 seconds).

What tire pressure should I use for my 2004 Tundra?

Recommended cold tire pressure is 32 psi front and 35 psi rear for standard tires. Always refer to the sticker on the driver's door jamb.

How often should I change the timing belt on a 2004 Tundra V8?

The 4.7L V8 uses a timing belt, which should be replaced every 90,000 miles or 9 years, whichever comes first.

Does the 2004 Tundra have a cabin air filter?

No, the 2004 Tundra does not come with a cabin air filter. Some owners retrofit one, but it is not standard.

What is the fuel economy of the 2004 Toyota Tundra?

EPA estimates: 15-16 mpg city and 18-20 mpg highway for the V8, slightly worse for 4WD. Actual mileage varies.

How do I pair a Bluetooth device in a 2004 Tundra?

The 2004 Tundra does not have factory Bluetooth. Aftermarket kits are available for hands-free calling.

What transmission fluid does the 2004 Tundra use?

Use Toyota Type T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid. Capacity is about 12.1 quarts (11.5 L) for a complete drain and fill.

Where is the OBD-II port on a 2004 Tundra?

It is located under the driver's side dashboard, near the hood release lever, accessible from the driver's seat.

USER MANUAL Tundra (2004) TOYOTA

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2

Instrument cluster overview 10

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 12

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Instrument panel overview (standard and access cab models)

▶ Vehicles with manual transmission

1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Personal lights
5. Garage door opener box or auxiliary box
6. Side defroster outlet
7. Glove box
8. Power door lock switches
9. Power window switches
10. Manual transmission gear shift lever
11. Front drive control lever
12. Rear console box
13. Cup holders
14. Parking brake lever
15. Lower vent
16. Hood lock release lever
17. Window lock switch
18. Power rear view mirror control switches

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission (type A)

1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Automatic transmission selector lever
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary box
7. Side defroster outlet
8. Glove box
9. Power door lock switches
10. Power window switches
11. Auxiliary box
12. Rear console box
13. Cup holders
14. Lower vent
15. Hood lock release lever
16. Parking brake pedal
17. Window lock switch
18. Power rear view mirror control switches

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission (type B)

1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Automatic transmission selector lever
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary box
7. Side defroster outlet
8. Glove box
9. Power door lock switches
10. Power window switches
11. Front drive control lever
12. Rear condole box
13. Cup holders
14. Lower vent
15. Hood lock release lever
16. Parking brake pedal
17. Window lock switch
18. Power rear view mirror control switches

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. Outside rear view mirror heater switch
2. Clutch start cancel switch or power rear window switch
3. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches
4. Ignition switch
5. Wiper and washer switches
6. Cargo lamp switch
7. Emergency flasher switch
8. Car audio
9. Air conditioning controls
10. Front passenger's seat belt reminder light/passenger airbag off indicator
11. Passenger airbag manual on-off switch
12. Clock
13. "4LO" button (transfer mode selector button)
14. Cup holder
15. Power outlets
16. Ashtray
17. Cigarette lighter
18. "2WD/4HI" button (transfer mode selector button)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1. "AUTO LSD" switch
2. Cruise control switch
3. Audio remote control switches
4. Tilt steering lock release lever
5. Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system indicator light
6. Instrument panel light control knob

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Instrument panel overview (double cab models)

1. Side vents
2. Instrument cluster
3. Center vents
4. Multi-information display
5. Personal lights
6. Auxiliary b
7. Electric moon roof switches
8. Side defroster outlet
9. Glove box
10. Power door lock switches
11. Power window switches
12. Power outlets
13. Seat heater switches
14. Rear console box
15. Input terminal adapter
16. Headphone input jacks and headphone volume control dials
17. Cup holders
18. Lower vent
19. Hood lock release lever
20. Parking brake pedal
21. Window lock switch

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. Power rear window switch
2. Power rear view mirror control switches
3. Power outlet main switch
4. Instrument panel light control knob
5. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches
6. Wiper and washer switches
7. Automatic transmission selector lever
8. Emergency flasher switch
9. Car audio
10. Air conditioning controls
11. Front passenger's seat belt reminder light and theft deterrent system indicator light
12. Cargo lamp switch
13. Rear window and rear view mirror defogger switch
14. Clock
15. Cup holder
16. "4LO" button (transfer mode selector button)
17. "2WD/4HI" button (transfer mode selector button)
18. "AUTO LSD" switch

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1. Ashtray
2. Cigarette lighter
3. Cruise control switch
4. Ignition switch
5. Audio remote control switches
6. Tilt steering lock release lever

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Instrument cluster overview

▶With tachometer

1. Oil pressure gauge
2. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Shift position indicator lights (automatic transmission)
6. Voltmeter

7. Fuel gauge

8. Trip meter reset knob

9. Odometer and two trip meters
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

▶ Without tachometer

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Trip meter reset knob

6. Odometer and two trip meters

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

[A026]	Brake system warning light*1
	Driver's seat belt reminder light*1
PASSENGER [BW34]	Front passenger's seat belt reminder light*1
	Discharge warning light*1
[HOTY]	Low engine oil pressure warning light*1
[XTZZ]	Malfunction indicator lamp*1
	Low fuel level warning light*1
[4TBY] OR	Anti-lock brake system warning light ^1

[YCBW]	●Vehicle stability control system warning light*1●Traction control system warning light *1●“AUTO LSD” system warning light *1
	Open door warning light*1
	SRS warning light*1
[2C40]	Unengaged “Park” warning light*1
	Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light*1
[4TO3]	Low windshield washer fluid level warning light*1
	Passenger airbag off indicator light
	Headlight high beam indicator light

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

	Turn signal indicator lights
O/D OFF	Overdrive-off indicator light
PRN D 2 L	Automatic transmission indicator lights
4WD	Four-wheel drive indicator light
4HI	High speed four-wheel drive indicator light*2
4LO	Low speed four-wheel drive indicator light*2
	Slip indicator light
VSC OFF	Vehicle stability control system off indicator light
AUTO LSD	"AUTO LSD" indicator light

CRUISE

Cruise control Indicator light ^13

*1: For details, see "Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers" in Section 1-6.
*2: If this light flashes, see "Four-wheel drive system" in Section 1-7.
^*3 : If this light flashes, see "Cruise control" in Section 1–7.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1 - 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Other equipment

Multi-information display 286

Clock 296

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays 296

Power outlets (12 VDC) 297

Power outlet (115 VAC) 298

Glove box 299

Rear console box 305

Coin holder 307

Compact disc and cassette tape holder 309

Cassette tape holder 311

Cup holders 311

Note pad holder 314

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks 314

Floor mat 315

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Multi-information display—

1. "E/M" button
2. Garage door opener buttons
3. "MODE" button
4. Garage door opener indicator
5. Outside temperature display
6. Compass

—Before using the multi-information display

Operate the multi-information display with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to "ON", the last previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is turned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights are turned on, the brightness of the display will be reduced.

"E/M" button

This button is used to switch between English/U.S. Customary System and metric units of the outside temperature display.

Each time you push this button, the display switches. This is also linked to the multi-information display. The display variations are as follows;

Indication	Outside temperature
English/U.S. Customary System (E)	°F
Metric (M) °C

The Initial mode will be English/U.S. Customary System units, however, if the unit is switched to metric and the ignition switch is off, it will display metric units when the ignition switch is turned to "ON".

"MODE" button

This button is used to select the item. Every time you push the "MODE" button, the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Outside temperature display” in this Section.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Garage door opener

The garage door opener (HomeLink ^® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink ^® and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink®

The HomeLink ^® in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink ^® , install a new battery in the hand-held transmitter prior to programming.

The battery side of the hand-held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink ^® during the programming process.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure in "Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market".

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink® buttons you want to program. Push and hold down one of the buttons until the indicator corresponding to the selected channel begins to flash.

2. Place your hand-held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
   Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand-held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink® button.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink ^® changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink ^2 by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the "Rolling Code" type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink®) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the "Rolling Code" type, proceed to the heading "Programming a rolling code system".

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink ^® button to program another device.

Programming a rolling code system If your device is "Rolling Code" equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading "Programming the HomeLink ^3 " before proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the "training" button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner's guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this "training" button.
2. Press the "training" button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle's programmed HomeLink® button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink® unit and be able activate the garage door up/down.

1. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink ^® button to program another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink ^® buttons you want to program.

2. Place your hand-held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink ^® .

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.

1. Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
2. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand-held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete.

3. When the indicator light on the HomeLink ^© changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

4. Test the operation of the HomeLink ^® by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

5. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink ^® button to program another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink ^® buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLink ^® ”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink ^®

To operate the HomeLink ^® , press the appropriate HomeLink ^® button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink ^® indicator light should come on. The HomeLink ^® continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory.

CAUTION

- When programming the HomeLink ^® Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

- Do not use this HomeLink ^® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undersired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

—Outside temperature display —Compass

The outside temperature display indicates the outside air temperature.

Every time you push the "MODE" button, the display toggles through the following information. To use the outside temperature display, push the "MODE" button until the outside air temperature is displayed.

1. Compass and outside temperature
2. Display off (no compass)
3. Compass
4. Outside temperature

To set the unit, push the "E/M" button until the desired unit display appears.

The displayed value is updated every 2 second.

The displayed temperature ranges from -30^ ( -22^ ) up to 50^ ( 122^ ).

If there is some abnormality in the connection of the outside air temperature sensor, “--°C” (“--°F”) will appear on the display. If “--°C” (“--°F”) appears on the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “--”C" (“--”F") appears momentarily when the ignition is quickly turned to "ON". It is normal if it goes out soon.

The compass indicates the direction that the vehicle is heading. In the above case, it shows that the vehicle is heading south.

The direction display is updated every 2 seconds.

Displays	Directions
N	North
NE	Northeast
E	East
SE	Southeast
S	South
SW	Southwest
W	West
NW	Northwest

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
●The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object on or near the roof.)
●The battery has been disconnected.

The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see "CALIBRATING THE COMPASS" below.

If the direction is not indicated or the system does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Line drawing of a car front view with a black arrow pointing to the roof (no text or symbols)

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the roof of the vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the roof of the vehicle. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)

The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth's magnetic field. The angle of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and switch the display to the outside temperature. (To switch to this mode, see “—Outside temperature display” In this Section.)
2. Push and hold both the "MODE" and "E/M" buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds until the "VAR" indication appears on the compass display.
3. Push the "E/M" button several times until the desired zone number appears on the compass display.

If the button is not pushed for 10 seconds, the display returns to the compass/outside temperature mode and the number that is last set is memorized.

To select the zone where the vehicle is currently located, refer to the following map.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system for several seconds returns to the compass mode.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the compass may not change after a turn. In this case, the compass needs to be calibrated.

To calibrate the compass manually, do the following;

1. Stop the vehicle in a level place and switch the display to the outside temperature. (To switch to this mode, see "—Outside temperature display" in this Section.)

2. Push and hold both the "MODE" and "E/M" buttons simultaneously for 10 seconds until the "CAL" indication appears on the compass display. (At this time, the compass display is locked in "N".)

Simple diagram showing a car moving in a circular path with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block.

When the "CAL" indication goes off and the compass returns to the normal mode, calibration is complete.

If you want to restart the calibration before it is complete, push both of the "MODE" and "E/M" buttons simultaneously for 10 seconds again.

Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased your Toyota. And then always perform circling calibration after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.

• Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
  ●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

CAUTION

• When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
• Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

Clock Cigarette lighter and ashtrays

The digital clock indicates the time.

The key must be in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
To reset the hour: Push the "H" button. To reset the minutes: Push the "M" button. If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one o'clock).
When the instrument panel lights are turned on, the brightness of the time indication will be reduced.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

Cigarette lighter and front ashtray

Diagram of a car interior showing a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Rear ashtray

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the key must be in the "ACC" position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAYS

Front: To use the ashtray, pull it out. Rear: To use the ashtray, raise the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, push it back in completely.

Front—To remove the ashtray, press down on the lock spring plate and pull out.

Rear—To remove the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always completely close the ashtray after use.

Power outlets (12 VDC)

Type A

Type C

Type B

Type D

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

The power outlets are designed for power supply for car accessories.

The key must be in the "ACC" or "ON" position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

◆To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W.
◆To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
◆Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply for electric appliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the "ON" position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the power supply. The power supply will restart automatically when you use an appliance that operates within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main switch is turned off.

NOTICE

◆To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
◆Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances even though their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate properly.

●Appliances with high initial peak wattage: cathode-ray tube type televisions, compressor-driven refrigerators, electric pumps, electric tools, etc.
●Measuring devices which process precise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.
●Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.

Glove box

Diagram of a curved panel with a labeled component, no text or symbols present

To open the glove box door, pull the lever.

On some models, the glove box light will come on when the glove box is opened with the headlight switch on.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a vehicle air conditioning unit with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

The box is designed to store a garage door opener transmitter.

Open the cover and remove the Velcro square.

3D diagram of a mechanical component with arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Remove the paper strip covering the adhesive on back side of square and adhere the square to back side of the transmitter near the center.

Simple line drawing of a paperclip attached to a rectangular block, with an arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Please note if transmitter has wire clip for sun visor, this clip must be removed prior to adhesion of the Velcro.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's engine compartment with an arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

Place the transmitter with Velcro square facing inside of box into the box. Make sure the transmitter button is located above button pins.

Remove spacers from the center panel. Place the largest spacer on the pin that would be below transmitter button when the cover is closed. Close the cover.

When the garage door opener transmitter is properly installed, you can operate the transmitter by pushing the center panel of the cover.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a vehicle air vent with an inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

If the center panel does not contact your garage door opener transmitter:

• Check to see if spacer is on the correct pin.
• Attach another spacer to the top of original spacer. Check operation. If required, continue to add spacers until contact is achieved.

If the transmitter is clattering during driving, fill in a piece of felt or pad to prevent the transmitter from clattering.

CAUTION

●To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the garage door opener box closed while driving.
- Keep the remaining spacers away from children.

Interior view of a car showing hands interacting with a vehicle's air vent (no text or symbols visible)

Standard and access cab models only—The auxiliary box (stored in the glove box) and garage door opener box are interchangeable.

Removing the cover—

Half open the cover. Pinch each hinge and pull it out of its pivot one at a time as shown above.

Do not remove the cover forcibly.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand holding a car seatbelt with arrows indicating movement or adjustment (no text or symbols present)

Installing the cover—

Align the hinges to the pivots, and press each hinge until you hear a click.

Make sure that the cover opens and closes smoothly.

Auxiliary boxes

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the lids as shown in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

●To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving.
●Type A and B only—As these holders are designed for holding a light object such as an eyeglass, do not place any heavy objects in them. Heavy objects may cause the holder to open and contents to fly out resulting in injuries.

NOTICE

Type A and B only—During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

Interior view of a car showing a rear compartment with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Type A

Diagram showing two car seats with one seat highlighted, divided by a diagonal line (no text or symbols)

Type B

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type C

Type D

Type F (under the rear seat of double cab models)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Rear console box (type A)

Two-step diagram showing car interior components with arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present.

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the console box lid.

Diagram of a car gear shift lever with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, raise the upper tray by pulling up the lock release lever.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Rear console box (type B)

Diagram showing two steps of car seatbelt insertion, with arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the console box upper lid while pushing the lock release button.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, raise the console box lid by pulling up the lock release lever.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Coin holder (type A) Coin holder (type B)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car gear shift lever and internal components (no text or symbols)

The rear console box is equipped with a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the console box lid.
2. Push coins down into the holder.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The rear console box is equipped with a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the console box upper lid while pushing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Diagram showing car gear shift mechanism with directional arrows and a key inserted into the dashboard (no text or symbols)

The coin holder can be set in the console box.

To set the coin holder in the console box, raise the console box lid by pulling up the lock release lever.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Coin holder (type C)

The auxiliary box is equipped with a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Raise the auxiliary box lid while pushing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Compact disc and cassette tape holder (type A)

Diagram showing car interior components with arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Compact disc and cassette tape holder (type B)

The rear console box is equipped with compact disc and cassette tape holders.

To use the holders, raise the console box lid and upper tray by pulling up the lock release lever.

The plates for the compact disc and cassette tape holders are detachable.

The rear console box is equipped with a compact disc and cassette tape holder.

To use the holder, raise the console box lid by pulling up the lock release lever.

The compact disc and cassette tape holder is detachable.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Cassette tape holder Cup holders

Two-panel diagram showing a car interior with a handle and a directional arrow, no text or symbols present.

The auxiliary box is equipped with a cassette tape holder.

To use the holder, raise the auxiliary box lid while pushing the lock release button. The plate for the cassette tape holder is detachable.

The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely. To use them, observe the following illustrations.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram showing a car interior with a valve and gas stove, no text or symbols present

Type A

Type B Type C

2004 TUNDRA from Sep. '03 Prod. (OM34426U)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Type C cup holders are equipped with a detachable adapter for each holder. When you remove the adapter, a bigger cup can be held in the holder.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the cup and seat area (no text or symbols)

Type D

Simple line drawing of a room interior with a door and a tray, no text or symbols present

Type F

Diagram of a car interior showing a cylindrical component and gear mechanism (no text or symbols)

Type E

Diagram showing a car interior with a door and seat, no text or symbols present

Type G

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Note pad holder Grocery bag/cargo net hooks

Two-step diagram showing car seatbelt being lifted, with arrows indicating force direction (no text or symbols)

The rear console box is equipped with a note pad holder. This is designed to hold small paper such as note pads.

To use the holder, raise the console box upper lid while pushing the lock release button.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

These hooks are designed to hang things like grocery bags or cargo net. Although the cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment, these hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

◆To prevent damage to the hooks, avoid hanging heavy loads on them when using them as grocery bag hooks.
◆To prevent damage to the hook, avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it when using them as cargo net hooks.

Floor mat

Use a floor mat of the correct size. If the floor carpet and floor mat have a hole, then it is designed for use with a locking clip. Fix the floor mat with locking clip into the hole in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 16

Front doors 16

Side doors 18

Access doors 20

Wireless remote control system 21

Power windows 31

Rear side windows 34

Rear window 34

Power rear window 35

Tailgate 36

Hood 38

Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) 39

Theft deterrent system 40

Fuel tank cap 42

Electric moon roof 44

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Keys

Two identical key illustrations shown side by side, no text or symbols present

These keys work in every lock.

Since the doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a spare key in case you accidentally lock your key inside the vehicle.

Illustration of a key being inserted into a keyhole, showing the handle and keychain (no text or symbols present)

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Toyota dealer using the key number.

We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

Front doors (standard and access cab models)

Diagram of a car door handle with arrow indicating rotation and angle (no text or symbols)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with power door lock system— Both doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either door. In the driver's door lock, turning the key once will unlock the driver's door and twice in succession will unlock the driver's door and passenger's door simultaneously.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a car door with directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the lock position will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

Vehicles with power door lock system—The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignition switch when closing the front doors.

Diagram of a car interior with a key inserted into the dashboard, showing arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

Driver's side

Diagram of a car handle with two clips and a control knob, no text or symbols present

Passenger's side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the rear side.

Both doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Side doors (double cab models)

Diagram of a car door handle and seat assembly with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either front door. In the driver's door lock, turning the key once will unlock the driver's door and twice in succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to unlock all the doors can be changed to a single key turning operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously using a key, the interior light, ignition switch light, step light and cargo lamp will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. (For details, see "Center interior and personal lights", "Ignition switch and step lights" and "Cargo lamp" in Section 1-5.)

Interior view of a car showing a door with a scroll wheel and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock knobs are in the locked position.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Toyota strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the lock position will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

Doors cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is in the ignition.

Diagram showing a car interior with two arrows pointing to a control panel (no text or symbols present)

Driver's side

Diagram showing a mechanical component with two protruding pins and a separate inset view (no text or symbols)

Passenger's side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the rear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

When the front doors are locked with the inside lock knob, the key or the wireless remote control transmitter, the power door lock switch will not work until either front door is unlocked with the key, lock knob, or wireless remote control transmitter.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

REAR DOOR CHILD-PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the "LOCK" position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a rear door so it can be opened from the outside only, not from the inside. We recommend using this feature whenever small children are in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.

Access doors

(access cab models)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Wireless remote control (standard and access cab models for U.S.A. only)

For easy access to the rear seat, open the access door (rear door).

To open: First, open the front door widely. Then pull the outside handle or inside lever of the access door.

If you try to open the front and rear doors simultaneously, they will not open.

To close: First, close the access door completely. Then close the front door.

You can open and close the access door only when the front door is widely opened.

NOTICE

The front door and access door could be damaged if they hit each other when being opened or closed. Be sure to follow the above instructions.

Illustration of a pickup truck with a remote control device emitting signals (no text or symbols)

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

The wireless remote control system is designed to lock or unlock all the doors or activate the "PANIC" mode from a distance within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE DOORS

To lock and unlock all the doors, push the switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the "LOCK" switch. All the doors are locked simultaneously. At this time one beep will be heard, and the tall lights and front side marker lights will flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securely locked.

If any door is not securely closed, locking cannot be performed by the "LOCK" switch and a beep will sound continuously for 5 seconds. However, if the key is in the ignition, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the doors securely or push the "UNLOCK" switch.

To unlock: Push the "UNLOCK" switch once to unlock the driver's door alone. Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each time the "UNLOCK" switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the tail lights and front side marker lights will flash twice.

When the "UNLOCK" switch is pressed, the interior light, ignition switch light, step light and cargo lamp come on. The lights remain on for about 30 seconds unless any door is opened and closed.

You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature. If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again.

If the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" switch is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch and then push again.

Illustration of a car accident with a person falling and lightning, and a remote control device emitting sound waves (no text or symbols)

"PANIC" SWITCH

Pushing the "PANIC" switch blows the horn intermittently, flashes the headlights and tail lights, and turns on the interior light.

The "PANIC" switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop alarm midway, push the "PANIC" switch once again, lock or unlock any door with the key or transmitter, or turn the ignition key from the "LOCK" to "ON" position.

The "PANIC" mode does not work when the ignition key is in the ignition switch.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL

The wireless remote control transmitter is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the transmitter.

• Do not leave the transmitter on places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.
• Do not disassemble it.
  ●Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
  ●Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 remote keyless entry transmitters for the same vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information. If the wireless remote control transmitter does not actuate the doors or alarm, or operate from a normal distance;

• Check for closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The battery may have been consumed. Check the battery in the transmitter. To replace the battery, see "REPLACING THE BATTERY".

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

If you lose your transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See "If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter" in Section 4.)

MODEL/FCC ID: BAB237131-056 CAN: 2024 102 1519 MADE IN JAPAN

This complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed transmitter battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
◆Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.
◆Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Close-up of a car key with a scroll wheel and attached sensor port (no text or symbols visible)

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the transmitter case.

Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a smartphone with a key inserted, showing a hand holding a cable (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the rubber gasket and set it aside.

1. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

1. Put a new transmitter battery with positive (+) side up.

Place the rubber gasket back on the transmitter. Then close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

◆Make sure the positive side and negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.◆Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Wireless remote control (double cab models)

◆Do not touch or move any components inside of the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.

◆Be careful not to bend the electrode of the transmitter battery insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the transmitter case.

◆Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Illustration of a pickup truck with sensors and a remote control device, no text or symbols present

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

The wireless remote control system is designed to lock or unlock all the doors or activate the "PANIC" mode from a distance within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE DOORS

To lock and unlock all the doors, push the switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the "LOCK" switch. All the doors are locked simultaneously. At this time one beep will be heard, and the parking lights and tall lights flash once.

Check to see that all the doors are securely locked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed, locking cannot be performed by the "LOCK" switch and a beep will sound continuously for 10 seconds. However, if the key is in the ignition, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the doors securely or push the "UNLOCK" switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To unlock: Push the "UNLOCK" switch once to unlock the driver's door alone. Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each time the "UNLOCK" switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the parking lights and tail lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all the doors can be changed to a single switch operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously with a wireless remote control transmitter, the interior light, ignition switch light, step light and cargo lamp come on for about 15 seconds and then fade out, even if the door is not opened. (For details, see "Center interior and personal lights", "Ignition switch and step lights" and "Cargo lamp" in Section 1-5.) You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature. If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock function can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" switch is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch and then push again.

The wireless door locking or unlocking function can be erased. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

SWITCHING BEEP SOUND ON AND OFF You can switch the beep on and off. (The beep is on Initially and after battery replacement.)

To switch the beep on and off:

With the driver's door opened-

1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.

2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignition key again and turn it to the "ON" position.

3. After 10 seconds, push the same "LOCK", "UNLOCK" or "PANIC" switch twice within 10 seconds. Two beep sounds inform you that the program has been switched on or off.

If this procedure is not followed exactly, the beep will not operate as expected.

Check the beep ON/OFF operation by pushing the transmitter switch after you finish this procedure. If the beep does not operate as expected, repeat this procedure from step 1.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

"PANIC" SWITCH

Pushing the "PANIC" switch blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights and tail lights.

The "PANIC" switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop alarm midway, do the following:

●Push any of the switches on the wireless remote control transmitter.
- Unlock any of the doors with the key.
- Turn the ignition key from the "LOCK" to the "ON" position.

The "PANIC" mode does not work when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. This alarm function can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the transmitter.

• Do not leave the transmitter on places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.
• Do not disassemble it.
  ●Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
  ●Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter does not actuate the doors or alarm, or operate from a normal distance:

• Check for closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
  ●The battery may have been consumed. Check the battery in the transmitter. To replace the battery, see following "REPLACING THE BATTERY".

If you lose your transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See "If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter" in Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
◆Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.
◆Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the transmitter case.

Replace the battery by following these procedures:

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a hand holding a keychain with a screwdriver inserted, showing a circular component and an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

1. Put a new transmitter battery with positive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

◆Make sure the positive side and negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.
◆Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside of the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.

◆Be careful not to bend the electrode of the transmitter battery insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the transmitter case.

◆Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Power windows

Line drawing of a car interior with a key inserted, showing no text or symbols

Standard and access cab models

The windows can be operated with the switch on either front door (standard and access cab models)/each door (double cab models).

The power windows work when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, they work for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. They stop working when either front door is opened.

Use the switch on the driver's door.

Normal operation: The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch. To close: Pull up the switch.

Line drawing of a car interior with a key inserted, showing no text or symbols

Standard and access cab models

Diagram of a vehicle interior layout with no visible text or symbols

Double cab models

Top-down schematic of a vehicle or vehicle layout with no visible text, numbers, or symbols

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Automatic operation (to open only): Push the switch completely down and then release it. The window will fully open. To stop the window partway, lightly pull the switch up and then release it.

Diagram showing a pickup truck and a car interior with a tool, no text or symbols present

Standard and access cab models Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Driver's door switch (standard and access cab models)

Driver's door switches (double cab models)

Use the switches on the passenger's door (standard and access cab models)/passengers' doors (double cab models) or the switch on the driver's door that controls each passenger's window.

The window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Push down the switch. To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on the driver's door, the passenger's (standard and access cab models)/ passengers' (double cab models) window and power rear window cannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

●Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone's neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

- When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Rear side windows (access cab models)

• Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.
  ●Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Mechanical component with a black arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

To open the rear side window, pull the latch handle toward you and swing it fully out.

After closing the window, make sure it is completely closed.

Rear window

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, mounted on a vertical structure (no text or symbols present)

To open the rear window, push the lever and slide the window.

After closing the window, make sure it is completely closed.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Power rear window

Access cab models

The rear window can be operated with the switch on the instrument panel.

The ignition key must be in the "ON" position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are closed, they work 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. The power rear window stops working when either front door is opened.

The rear window moves as long as you hold the switch.

To open: Push the switch on the "→" (standard and access cab models) or "▼" (double cab models) side.

To close: Push the switch on the (standard and access cab models) or ("double cab models) side.

Double cab models only—At this time, the window will stop partway. Push the switch again to fully close the window.

Line drawing of a car interior with a key inserted into the seat (no text or symbols)

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

To close: Push the switch on the (standard and access cab models) or ("double cab models) side.

Double cab models only—At this time, the window will stop partway. Push the switch again to fully close the window.

Line drawing of a vehicle interior with a hand cursor pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols)

Double cab models

If you push in the window lock switch on the driver's door, the rear window cannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power rear window, always make sure there is nobody around the power rear window. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone's neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power rear window, make sure he or she operates the window safely.
- When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power rear window switch without supervision.
- Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

●Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power back window switch and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.
- Keep the rear window closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. OPENING

Tailgate

Diagram showing a device being inserted into a slot, with no visible text or symbols

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up. The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal.

See "—Stowage precautions" in Section 2 for precautions when loading luggage.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling and pushing it to make sure it is securely closed.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

REMOVAL

1. Open the tailgate to the angle where you can release the brackets on the support cables from the lugs on both sides.

To release the support cable bracket, lift it up and slide it off.

Diagram showing a car interior with a lever mechanism and a close-up view of the lever handle (no text or symbols present)

1. Tilt the tailgate to about 30^ from vertical and pull up the right side of the tailgate to unhook the right side.

1. Slide the tailgate a little to the right to unhook the left side.

To attach the tailgate, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to- ward you to make sure it is securely closed.

We recommend you keep the tailgate closed when not in use.

NOTICE

Make sure the support brackets are securely latched on both side panels when installing the tailgate.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a hand holding a car door with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it to lock or unlock the tailgate.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise. To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

Hood

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will spring up slightly.

Diagram showing a car front view and a vehicle interior with a circular component, no text or symbols present.

1. In front of the vehicle, pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks into place. If necessary, press down gently on the front edge to lock it.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) (standard and access cab models for U.S.A. only)

Illustration of a person falling into the back of a car with lightning bolts and motion lines indicating shock (no text or symbols)

TVIP is a theft deterrent system. If someone attempts to damage or break into your vehicle, the system sounds the alarm while flashing the lights.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

You can set the system as follows.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.

3. Close all the doors securely.

4. Lock all the doors with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter. At this time, the TVIP indicator light comes on.

The system will be set in 30 seconds. When the system is set, the indicator light will start to flash.

1. Make sure that the indicator light flashes. Then you may leave the vehicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when you set the system because unlocking from the inside activates the alarm.

Activating the alarm

If the system detects a threat to the vehicle, blows the horn intermittently for one minute while flashing headlights, tail lights and front side marker lights, and turns on the interior light. The system detects a threat under any of the following conditions:

• Either of the front doors is unlocked by means other than the key or remote keyless entry transmitter. If the key is not in the ignition switch, all the doors will be automatically locked again.
  ●Any door is forcibly opened.
  ●The side windows are tapped or broken.
  ●The battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.
  ●The ignition is hotwired.

After one minute, the alarm automatically stops and the indicator light starts flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, until you cancel the system, the system automatically resets the alarm after the alarm has stopped.

The alarm will activate again under the same circumstances described in "Activating the alarm".

Stopping the alarm

You can stop the alarm in either of the following ways:

• Unlock any of the doors with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
• Place the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

You can cancel the system as described in "Stopping the alarm".

If you cancel the system by unlocking any of the doors but no door is opened within 30 seconds, all the doors lock automatically and the system will be set again.

NOTE: If your vehicle's tail lights and front side marker lights turn on and the buzzer sounds for 2 seconds when the system is canceled, the trigger memory was activated; an alarm was triggered while you were away from the vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

You can check the system operation as follows.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in "SETTING THE SYSTEM".

3. Unlock the driver's door with the inside lock knob. The system should activate and the alarm should sound.
4. Stop the alarm as described in "Stopping the alarm".
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the passenger's door.

If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Theft deterrent system (double cab models)

Illustration of a person falling into the air around a car with lightning bolts, no text or symbols present

To deter vehicle theft, the system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked or opened or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights and tail lights.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

1. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.

2. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all the doors and hood are closed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after 30 seconds. When the system is set, the indicator light will start flashing again.

1. After making sure the indicator light starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when you set the system, because unlocking from the inside will activate the system. WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under the following conditions:

• If any of the doors is unlocked or opened without the key or wireless remote control transmitter, or if the hood is forcibly opened
• If the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected

The indicator light will come on when the system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the key is not in the ignition switch, all the doors will re-lock automatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will starts flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the same circumstances described in "Activating the system".

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following two ways:

• Turn the ignition key from the "LOCK" to "ON" position.
• Unlock any of the doors with the key or wireless remote control transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at the same time.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above. The doors should be locked with the key or wireless remote control transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator light goes off or starts flashing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The system should activate the alarm.
4. Stopping the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood. When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Fuel tank cap

Without tachometer

This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle.

With tachometer

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Simple diagram of a curved arrow inside a rounded square, labeled '1' and 'R12030' (no text or symbols within the diagram itself)

Type A

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the door toward out as shown. When refueling, turn off the engine.

Type A

Diagram of a spherical object with an arrow indicating direction, labeled '1' and 'R12031' (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Type B

Type B

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to point 2). Pause slightly before removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened.

When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully closed.

If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Electric moon roof

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the switches between the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed by hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the "∧" (rear) side.

The roof will open and stop partway 135 mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push “^” (rear) side again, the moon roof will open fully. To stop the roof partway, push the same side or “∨” (front) side while the roof is moving.

As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway 135 mm (5.3 in.) from the fully opened position.

The sun shade will be opened together with the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the "∨" (front) side.

The roof will fully close. To stop the roof partway, push the same side or “^” (rear) side briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the "UP" side.

To lower: Push the switch on the opposite side of "UP".

You may stop the moon roof at any desired position. The roof will move while the switch is being pushed and stop when released.

Key off operation: If all the doors are closed, it works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned off. It stops working when any of the doors is opened.

Jam protection function: If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame during closing operation, the moon roof stops and opens half way.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

●While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
●Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someone's neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.
- Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

●Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.
●Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening.
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully closed.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 48

Front seats 48

Swing-up rear seats 53

Tumbling rear seats 54

Head restraints 56

Armrest 57

Seat heaters 58

Seat belts 59

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 68

Passenger airbag manual on-off switch 84

Child restraint 85

Seats

While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

• Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit on top of a folded-down seatback, or in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
  ●During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration ("NHTSA") advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

- Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

●Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Front passenger seats

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

—Seat adjustment precautions

CAUTION

• Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
• Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.
  ●After adjusting the seat position, release the lever and try sliding the seat forward and backward to make sure it is locked in position.
  ●After adjusting the seatback, push your body back against the seat to make sure the seat is locked in position.
• Do not put objects under the seats. Otherwise, the objects may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat may suddenly move, causing the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
  ●While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. Otherwise, your hands or fingers may be caught and injured.

—Adjusting front seats (manual seat)

Separate and split bench seat

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Line drawing of a car backseat with seat covers and a belt buckle (no text or symbols)

Non-split bench seat

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER Separate and split bench seat: Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.

Non-split bench seat: Pull the lever up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.

1. DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING KNOB

Turn the knob either way.

Lean forward and pull the lever up. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Adjusting front seats (power seats)

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at that position.

Do not place anything under the front seats, as this might interfere with the seat movement.

1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.

1. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either way.

The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Tilting passenger's seatback for rear seat entry (access cab models)

Diagram of a car seat assembly with seatbelt and seatbelt switch (no text or symbols)

For easy access to the rear seat, do this.

Lift the seatback angle adjusting lever or press the pedal behind the sealback.

The seatback will tilt forward.

After passengers are in, lift up the seat-back until it locks.

—Folding seatback (non-split bench seat)

Diagram of a car seatbelt device with no visible text or symbols

Pull the seatback lock release lever and fold down the seatback.

Hold the lever until you have swung the seatback forward slightly.

Swing-up rear seats (access cab models)

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to the upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

• Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
• Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing two clamps securing a seat (no text or symbols)

1. Stow the rear seat belt and buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the belt and buckles from falling out when you swing up the rear seat.

NOTICE

The seat belt and buckles must be stowed before you swing up the rear seat.

Diagram of a car back panel with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

1. Raise the bottom cushion while pushing the lock release lever.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Tumbling rear seats (double cab models)

CAUTION

When returning the bottom cushion to its original position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

●Make sure the bottom cushion is securely locked by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
●Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the bottom cushion and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

Technical diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with two clips and a belt, no text or symbols present

BEFORE TUMBLING REAR SEATS

Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out when you tumble the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you fold up the rear seat.

TUMBLING REAR SEATS

1. Lower the head restraints to the lowest position. Fold down the seatback while pulling the seatback angle adjusting lever and swing the whole seat up and forward while pulling the seat lock release lever on the side.

To return the tumbled seat to the original position, reverse the above operation.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

●Make sure people or luggage are clear of the seat. Then, hold the seat and slowly move it. Otherwise, people may be injured or luggage may be damaged, if the seat hits them.
●To avoid serious injury, do not sit on the folded seatback.
- Use the seat lock release lever on the side only when tumbling the seat.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with directional arrows and a valve (no text or symbols)

1. Take the holding strap out of its hole, and hook the strap onto the assist grip. Then, pull the strap on the free end to secure the seat.

When returning the rear seat to its original position, put the holding strap into the hole.

WHEN RETURNING THE REAR SEATS

If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not try it forcibly. Release the lock of the seat belt in the following way. Push in the lower front edge of the seatback cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and let the seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When tumbling the rear seats, fix the seats securely by adjusting the length of the holding strap. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Head restraints

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

●Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
●Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
•Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are arranged in their proper position and are ready to use.

Diagram of a device with a lid and arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

Front

Diagram showing two car seats mounted on a vehicle, with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Rear (double cab models)

Diagram of a car hood with a cylindrical device and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Rear (access cab models)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Rear center head restraint (double cab models only)—When an occupant sits on the center position of the rear seats, always pull up the rear center head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

• Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.
  ●After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.
• Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Armrest

Type A

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Type B

Diagram of a car backrest with a briefcase and directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Type C

To use the armrest, do this.

Type A

To lower: Pull the lock release strap and down the armrest.

To raise: Push down the lock release knob and up the armrest.

Type B—Pull the armrest down as shown in the illustration.

Type C—Pull the armrest out as shown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Seat heaters

Medical illustration showing a cross-sectional view of internal organs with an inset close-up of three labeled anatomical structures (no text or symbols present)

To turn on the seat heater, push the switch to "HI" (high heating temperature) or "LO" (low heating temperature). At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.

The key must be in the "ON" position to operate seat heaters.

Pushing lightly on the opposite side will turn it off.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it may make them feel too hot or cause burns at low temperatures (erythema, varicella). Use extra caution for;

●Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or handicapped persons
●Persons who have delicate skin
●Persons who are exhausted
●Person who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belts. See "Child restraint" in this Section for details.

STANDARD CAB MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the seat and must be restrained using the vehicle's seat belt.

ACCESS CAB AND DOUBLE CAB MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle's seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not provide sufficient restraint.

Small-framed person or youth in a 3-point type seat belt. On models with a non-split bench seat, have a small-framed person or youth sit slightly closer to the center of the vehicle (so the shoulder belt does not cross over the neck). On models with separate seats and a split bench seat, move the seat fully backward.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe the following:

• Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people—even children.
  ●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.

• Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or side doors.

• Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
• Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into contact with the belt—they may severely weaken the belts. (See "Cleaning the interior" in Section 5.)
  -Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

—Fastening front outside seat belts and rear outside seat belts (standard and access cab models)/front and rear seat belts (double cab models)

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see "Child restraint" in this Section.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

CAUTION

• Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.
• Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips—not on your waist, then adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a mechanical device with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Standard and double cab models

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.

Standard and double cab models—

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button and slide the anchor down.

Access cab models—

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Pull the lock release knob and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.

Illustration of a person's seatbelt being adjusted to form a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Access cab models

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause severe injuries in a collision.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Fastening front center seat belt and rear center seat belt (standard and access cab models only)

Sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, insert the tab into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

If the belt is not long enough for you, hold the tab at a right angle to the belt and pull on the tab.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

Remove excess length of the belt and adjust the belt position.

To shorten the belt, pull the free end of the belt.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips—not on your waist, then adjust it to a snug fit.

CAUTION

Both high-positioned and loose-fitting lap belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Stowing the rear seat belt and buckles (access cab models)

Illustration of a person's seatbelt being adjusted for a piece, no text or symbols present

To release the belt, press the buckle-release button.

Diagram of two mechanical components with arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

The rear seat belt and buckles can be stowed when not in use.
Seat belt and buckles must be stowed before you swing up the bottom cushion. (See "Swing-up rear seats" in this Section.)

—Stowing the rear seat belt buckles (double cab models)

Diagram of car seatbelt buckle fastening mechanism (no text or symbols)

The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed when not in use.
Seat belt buckles must be stowed before you fold the seatback. (See "Tumbling rear seats" in this Section.)

—Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.

●Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one originally intended.

• Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
• Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle being inserted into a cable (no text or symbols present)

To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the "PRESS" signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

—Seat belt pretensioners

Interior view of a car showing two people seated in the back seat, with dashboard and steering wheel visible (no text or symbols)

The driver and front passenger seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the occupants.

The seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passenger in the front seat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components and their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
4. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of non-toxic gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This gas is normally harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the seat belt pretensioners in some cases.

◆Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player
◆Repairs on or near the front seat belt pretensioner assemblies
◆Modification of the suspension system
◆Modification of the front end structure
◆Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end
◆Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console

R13015

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see

"Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers" In Section 1–6.)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

• When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the light does not come on, remains on or flashes.
  ●The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
• If any seat belt does not retract or can not be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt pretensioner.
  ●The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

●The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
- Either seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag (standard and access cab models)

Illustration of a car interior with two silhouetted figures and a large circular object, no visible text or symbols

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and right front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

Vehicles with bench type front seats—The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver and right front passenger and they are not designed to protect an occupant in the front center seating position.

In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.

The front passenger airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front seat.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and right front passenger when the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

●The SRS airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see "Seat belts" in this Section.

- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

The passenger airbag system is equipped with a manual on-off switch and indicator light. Turning the passenger airbag manual on-off switch clock wise to the "ON" position makes the passenger airbag system operational. Turning the passenger airbag manual on-off switch counterclockwise to the "OFF" position disables the passenger airbag system. The indicator light on the passenger airbag manual on-off switch will come on when the passenger airbag system has been disabled.

See "Passenger airbag manual on-off switch" in this Section for detail.

CAUTION

●Make sure that the indicator light is off.
- Do not turn off the passenger air-bag manual on-off switch except when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the right front passenger seating position.
- When the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is turned off, the passenger airbag will not inflate in a collision and turning off the passenger airbag can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of serious personal injuries.

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because:●Vehicle has no rear seat;● Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or●The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:●Vehicle has no rear seat;●Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or●The child has a medical condition which, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician:●Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and●Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please contact NHTSA at 1-800-424-9393 or Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371.

The SRS airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle "underrides", or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS airbags and front seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The SRS airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS airbags may occur.

The SRS airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are shown in the Illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for right front passenger (airbag and inflator)
4. Passenger airbag manual on-off switch
5. Airbag sensor assembly
6. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver's vision should it be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to: avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Toyota strongly recommends that:

●The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
●The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.
●All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see “—Front seat precautions” in this Section.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

A member of a passenger risk group should never sit or be occupied in the front outside passenger seat with airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.

- Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained. - Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

- Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

- Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

- Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag cover, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system in some cases.

◆Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

◆Modification of the suspension system

◆Modification of the front end structure

◆Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

◆Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag

R13015

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, seat bolt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see "Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers" in Section 1-6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

• When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the light does not come on, remains on or flashes.
  ●The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag (double cab models)

Top-down line drawing of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

●The SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

●The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a patient's arm (no text or labels)

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle Interior.

The front passenger airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front seat. Always wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The SRS airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see "Seat belts" in this Section.

- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

The SRS airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle "underrides", or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The SRS airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS airbags may occur.

The SRS airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are shown in the Illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)
4. Airbag sensor assembly
5. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver's vision should it be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to: avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Toyota strongly recommends that:

●The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
●The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.
●All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see “—Front seat precautions” in this Section.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.

- Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained. - Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

- Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

- Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

- Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag cover, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.

◆Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player

◆Modification of the suspension system

◆Modification of the front end structure

◆Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end

◆Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Simple black-and-white icon depicting a person running with a stick, no text or symbols present.

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, seat bolt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see "Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers" in Section 1–6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

• When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the light does not come on, remains on or flashes.
  ●The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.

Top-down line drawing of a car dashboard and rearview mirror (no text or symbols)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible:

●The SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Passenger airbag manual on-off switch (standard cab and access cab models only)

This on-off switch is designed to disable the passenger airbag in order to allow usage, if necessary, of a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the right front passenger seating position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

Operate on-off switch as follows:

Insert key into the keyhole and turn it.

To turn passenger airbag on: Turn the key clockwise to the "ON" position.

To turn passenger airbag off: Turn the key counterclockwise to the "OFF" position.

The indicator light comes on when the passenger airbag system is off.

CAUTION

●Make sure that the indicator light is off.

- Do not turn off the passenger air-bag manual on-off switch except when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 (page 71) is occupying the right front passenger seating position.

- When the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is turned off, the passenger airbag will not inflate in a collision and turning off the passenger airbag can reduce the occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of serious personal injuries.

For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle's seat belt. See "Seat belts" in this Section for details.

CAUTION

- For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

Standard and access cab models—

●STANDARD CAB MODELS—

Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child.

ACCESS CAB MODELS—

Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

●Never put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger risk group on the right front passenger seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

If you must put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger risk group on the right front seat, make sure the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is in the "OFF" position and that the indicator light is on. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

- Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Double cab models—

●Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

- Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if a rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

- A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

- Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

—Child restraint system

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with either the lap belt or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer's instructions which accompany the child restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer's instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat if your vehicle is equipped with rear seats. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

—Types of child restraint system

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child's age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system.

For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” in this Section.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, holding a steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

(A) Infant seat

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

(B) Convertible seat

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Installation with 2-point type seat belt

Illustration of a child sitting on a car seatbelt inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

(C) Booster seat

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a child seated inside, showing no text or symbols

CAUTION

Ignoring the above instructions may result in a serious injury in case of an accident.

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

With the child restraint system installed, check that your driving position is satisfactory and that the child restraint system does not interfere with your driving.

If your driving position is not satisfactory, or the child restraint system interferes with your driving, install it at another position.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child system is installed on the front passenger seat.

When you install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat, turn the passenger airbag manual on-off switch counterclockwise to the "OFF" position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the system is off.

CAUTION

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat, make sure the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is in the "OFF" position and that the indicator light is on.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

Illustration of a hand securing a seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols)

1. Run the center lap belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the lap belt.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap belt is not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt drive mechanism (no text or symbols)

1. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling its free end to hold the infant seat securely.

Illustration of a hand adjusting a seatbelt on a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a key inserted, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols visible)

1. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, viewed from inside (no text or symbols)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in forward-facing or rear-facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer's instruction about the applicable age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.

With the child restraint system installed, check that your driving position is satisfactory and that the child restraint system does not interfere with your driving.

If your driving position is not satisfactory, or the child restraint system interferes with your driving, install it at another position.

92

CAUTION

Ignoring the above instructions may result in a serious injury in case of an accident.

CAUTION

Rear-facing child restraint system: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child system is installed on the front passenger seat.

2004 TUNDRA from Sep. '03 Prod. (OM34426U)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

When you install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat, turn the passenger airbag manual on-off switch counterclockwise to the "OFF" position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the system is off.

CAUTION

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat, make sure the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is in the "OFF" position and that the indicator light is on.

CAUTION

Forward-facing child restraint system: A forward-facing child restraint system should never be installed on the front passenger seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating position.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

Illustration of a seatbelt buckle with a belt buckle and arrow indicating force (no text or symbols)

1. Run the center lap belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the lap belt.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap belt is not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a seatbelt device inside a vehicle cabin (no text or symbols visible)

1. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling its free end to hold the convertible seat securely.

Illustration of a person using a seatbelt to lift a vehicle (no text or symbols present)

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a key inserted, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

1. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Installation with 3-point type seat belt (standard and access cab models)

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, viewed from inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child system is installed on the front passenger seat.

When you install a rear-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group on the right front seat, turn the passenger airbag manual on-off switch counterclockwise to the "OFF" position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the system is off.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right front seat, make sure the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is in the "OFF" position and that the indicator light is on.

CAUTION

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a piece of material (no text or symbols visible)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Medical illustration showing a hand holding a cable with a forceps, no text or symbols present

1. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.
   To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a clamping mechanism with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a patient's arm, with no visible text or symbols.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Close-up illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted (no text or symbols visible)

1. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.

Interior view of a car showing a child seated in a seat, with no visible text or symbols

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION A convertible seat must be used in forward-facing or rear-facing position depending on the child's age and size. When installing, follow the manufacturer's instruction about the applicable child's age and size as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Rear-facing child restraint system: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child system is installed on the front passenger seat.

When you install a rear-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group on the right front seat, turn the passenger airbag manual on-off switch counterclockwise to the "OFF" position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the system is off.

CAUTION

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right front seat, make sure the passenger airbag manual on-off switch is in the "OFF" position and that the indicator light is on.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Forward-facing child restraint system: A forward-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group should never be installed on the right front passenger seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

CAUTION

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision. - If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the Instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Medical illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, showing forceps and a valve (no text or symbols)

1. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
   To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Line drawing of a car seatbelt device inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a black strap and a white strap (no text or symbols visible)

1. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, with no visible text or symbols

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in forward-facing position only.

CAUTION

A forward-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group should never be installed on the front outside passenger seat with the passenger airbag manual on-off switch in the "ON" position, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating position. (For details, see "SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag" in this Section.)

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat using a seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on child's hips. See "Seat belts" in this Section for details.

CAUTION

●Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child's neck, but not falling off child's shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
- Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child's hips as possible.
- For child's safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child's arm.
●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle fastening a seat (no text or symbols)

1. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

—Installation with 3-point type seat belt (double cab models)

Illustration of a child in a car seatbelt inside a vehicle, with no visible text or symbols

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted with a belt, showing no text or symbols

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Medical illustration showing a car seatbelt buckle being lifted by a cable, with no text or symbols present.

1. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.
   To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle adjustment mechanism with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a car seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Close-up illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, showing no text or symbols

1. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.

Diagram of a car interior showing a child seated inside a seat, with no visible text or symbols.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION A convertible seat must be used in forward-facing or rear-facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer's instructions about the applicable age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

- A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

- Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupants, may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the driver's seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a car seat assembly with a belt buckle and directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the Instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.
- If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Interior view of a car seatbelt device with a black arrow indicating force or insertion (no text or symbols present)

1. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
   To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt buckle being inserted into the cab (no text or symbols visible)

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever and bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

1. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt inside a car, with no visible text or symbols

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in forward-facing position only.

CAUTION

A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seatbelt, holding a device with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on child's hips. See "Seat belts" in this Section for details.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

●Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child's neck, but not falling off child's shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
- Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child's hips as possible.
- For child's safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child's arm.
●After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.
- Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

• If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with a downward arrow and label R13294 (no readable text or symbols)

1. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle-release button and allow the belt to retract.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Using a top strap (standard cab models)

Close-up of a car seatbelt switch with a black arrow pointing to the lock (no text or symbols visible)

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for (each) passenger seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of user ready anchor brackets.

Diagram of a car interior showing a cylindrical component and directional arrows, no text or symbols present

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the passenger head restraint.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1. Lightly push down on the top surface of the anchor bracket cover, then pull it forward to remove.

1. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever handle and gear shift with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Replace the passenger head restraint.

Store any removed covers in a safe place such as the glove box.

Be sure to replace all covers when the anchor bracket is not in use.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Using a top strap (access cab models)

Interior view of a car seat assembly with visible seatbelt and seatbelt fasteners (no text or symbols)

Outside position

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt, rearview compartment, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Center position

Use the routing device on the rear of the seat back and the anchor bracket on the side floor to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of user ready anchor brackets.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: Outside position
1. Remove the head restraint.

1. Route the top strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration.
   

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a belt switch, showing no text or symbols

1. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket on the side floor and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Diagram of a car gear shift lever with a cylindrical component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car interior showing a box being removed with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Replace the head restraint. Center position

2. Fold down the cup holder, unfasten the Velcro that attaches the anchor bracket cover, and lift the cover.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seat, seat, and rear compartment (no text or symbols)

1. Route the top strap through the slot on top of the seat, pass the strap through the seat, then latch the hook onto the anchor bracket. Close the cover and return the cup holder to the original position.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt device inside a vehicle cabin (no text or symbols)

1. Move the child restraint system to the correct position. Then fix the child restraint system with the seat belt and tighten the top strap.

—Using a top strap (double cab models)

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat (no text or symbols)

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Use one anchorage on the back of rear seats and two anchorages on the floor as shown above to attach the top strap.

Anchors are installed for each rear seating position.

TO USE THE ANCHORAGES:

1. Remove the head restraint.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt buckle and attached bracket (no text or symbols)

Outside position

Diagram of a car seatbelt device inside a vehicle cab, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

Center position

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorages and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see "Child restraint" in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a black arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Replace the head restraint.

—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (standard cab models)

Diagram of a vehicle rear view showing internal compartments and seat structure (no text or symbols)

Non-split bench seat

Diagram of a car backseat layout showing seat, seat, and seat compartments (no text or labels)

Split bench seat

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the front seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seat-back of the right side of the seat as shown in the illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.

Type A

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the tag on the seat cushion (non-split bench seat) or seatback (split bench seat).

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the tag on the seat cushion (non-split bench seat) or seatback (split bench seat).

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “—Using a top strap” in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

• When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.
  ●Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
  ●After securing the child restraint system, never slide or recline the seat.

—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (access cab models)

Diagram of two car seats inside a vehicle chassis, showing seat arrangement and no text or symbols

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seat-back of the outsides of the rear seat as shown in the illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type A

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the tag on the seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the tag on the seatback.
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “—Using a top strap” in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

• When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.
• Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
  ●After securing the child restraint system, never slide or recline the seat.
• Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages (double cab models)

Top-down view of a car backseat with a backpack seat, no text or symbols visible

Center

Line drawing of a car backseat with a person standing beside it, no text or symbols present

Left

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the center and left positions of the rear seats.

The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seat-back for center and left positions of rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.

Type A

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Turn up the covers for left lower anchorage on the center position of the seats and for anchorages on the left side position of the seats, and remove the cap for the right lower anchorage of the center position of the seat as shown in the illustration.
2. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag and cap in the seat cushion.
3. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type B—

1. Turn up the covers for left lower anchorage on the center position of the seats and for anchorages on the left side of the position of the seat, and remove the cap for the right lower anchorage of the center position of the seat as shown in the illustration.
2. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag in the seat cushion.
3. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “—Using a top strap” in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

• When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.
• Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
  ●After securing the child restraint system, never recline the seat.
• Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. Otherwise, the child or front seat occupant(s) may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel 130

Outside rear view mirrors 130

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror 132

Sunvisors 133

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—

Diagram of a car steering wheel with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull the lock release lever toward you, tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle and release the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever.

Side view of a car with a visible front mirror reflecting a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.

Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger's side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than when seen in a flat mirror.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Power rear view mirror control

CAUTION

• Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
• On some models, since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the outside rear view mirror heater switch is on.

Standard and access cab models

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to be adjusted
   Push the switch to "L" (left) or "R" (right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror Push the switch in the desired direction.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Folding rear view mirrors

Diagram of a car seatbelt with dashed outline and arrow indicating side arm (no text or symbols)

The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas. To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Diagram of a car rearview seat with two labeled parts (1 and 2), no text or symbols present.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you during night driving, operate the lever on the lower edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Sun visors—

Standard and access cab models

To block out glare, move the sun visor. To block out glare from the front—Swing down the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing down the sun visor, remove it from the hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you, extend the plate at the end of the visor (to position 3).

Illustration of a hand holding a device with a downward arrow, no text or symbols present

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

Diagram showing a directional arrow pointing downward on a shaded rectangular area, with no visible text or symbols.

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To block the glare from the front when the main sun visor is swung to the lateral side (position 2), swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end of the sun visor when the visor is in the position 1. It can cover the anti-glare inside rear view mirror and obstruct the rear view.

—Vanity mirrors (with light)

Diagram of a device interior with a central component and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Standard and access cab models

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down the sun visor and open the cover.

The vanity light(s) comes on when you open the cover.

Diagram of a vehicle battery pack with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Lights and Wipers

Headlights and turn signals 136

Emergency flashers 137

Instrument panel light control 138

Front fog lights 138

Interior light 139

Personal lights 139

Center interior and personal lights 140

Ignition switch and step lights 141

Cargo lamp 142

Windshield wipers and washer 143

Outside rear view mirror heaters 144

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ..... 145

Headlights and turn signals

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the above

The lights automatically turn off when the driver's door is opened with the ignition turned off. To turn them on again, turn the key to the "ON" position or actuate the headlight switch. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

Daytime running light system (on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the "OFF" position. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn the headlights to full intensity for driving at night.

High-Low beams—For high beams, turn the headlights on and push the lever away from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams. The headlight high beam indicator light (blue light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights (position 3)—Pull the lever all the way back. The high beam headlights turn off when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights with the knob turned to "OFF".

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position 1.

The key must be in the "ON" position. The lever automatically returns after you make a turn, but you may have to return it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the pressure point (position 2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green lights) on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, a front or rear turn signal bulb is burned out.

Emergency flashers

Simple line drawing of a car interior with circular and oval shapes, no text or symbols present

To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if your vehicle must be stopped where it might be a traffic hazard. Always pull as far off the road as possible.

The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are operating.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights

Standard and access cab models

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist the band of the headlight/turn signal lever. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Interior light Personal lights

To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

"ON"—Keeps the light on all the time.

"OFF"—Turns the light off.

"DOOR"—Turns the light on when any door is opened. The light goes off when all the doors are closed.

Standard and access cab models

Diagram of a car air conditioner panel with two buttons and a keypad (no text or symbols)

Double cab models

Standard and access cab models—

To turn on the light, push the lens on your side. To turn the light off, push the lens once again.

The personal light switch has the following positions:

"OFF"—Turns the lights off.

"DOOR"—Turns the lights on when any of the doors are opened.

Double cab models—

To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn the light off, push the switch once again.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Center interior and personal lights

Type A

Diagram of a device interior with labeled ports and arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Type B

CENTER INTERIOR LIGHT

Type A —

To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

"OFF"—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of the doors is opened. The light remains on when all the doors are closed.

Type B —

To turn on the interior lights, push the switch.

The interior light switch has the following positions:

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of the doors is opened. The light remains on when all the doors are closed.

"OFF"—The lights are off unless you operate either outside switch.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

When the switch is in the "DOOR" position and any of the doors is opened, the light will come on. After all the doors are closed, the light remains on for a certain time before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes out immediately:

- All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in "ACC" or "ON" position.

- The ignition key is turned to "ACC", "ON" or "START" after all the doors are closed.

●All the doors are locked when the light is still on.

When all the doors are unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter simultaneously, the lights come on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

- Cancelling the door key or wireless remote control transmitter linked operation

- Changing the timing for the light turning off

To prevent the battery being discharged, the light will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened with the switch at "DOOR" position for 20 minutes or more.

CENTER PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the center personal light, push the switch. To turn the light off, push the switch once again.

Ignition switch and step lights

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Standard and access cab models—

For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when the driver's door is opened. The step light also comes on when the driver's door is opened.

The ignition switch light remains on for some time after the driver's door is closed.

Double cab models—

For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors are opened. The step light also comes on when the any of the doors are opened.

The lights remain on for some time after all the doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the lights go off immediately.

• All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
  ●The ignition key is turned to the "ACC", "ON", or "START" position after all the doors are closed.
  ●All the doors are closed and locked.

When all the doors are unlocked using either the key or the wireless remote control transmitter simultaneously, the lights will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged, the lights will automatically turn off when the key is removed and the door is left opened for 20 minutes or more.

The following adjustments can be made in this system. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

• Cancelling the door key or wireless remote control transmitter linked operation
  ●Changing the timing for the light turning off

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Cargo lamp

Standard and access cab models Double cab models

The cargo lamp is designed to light up the rear deck of your vehicle.

By pushing the "CARGO LAMP" switch

To turn on: Push the "CARGO LAMP" switch once.

At this time, the indicator light on the instrument panel will come on.

To turn off: Push the "CARGO LAMP" switch once again.

By locking and unlocking the doors (vehicles with the power door lock system)

You can operate the cargo lump by this method when all the doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position or the key is removed.

To turn on: Unlock the doors with the key, the power door lock switch or the wireless remote control transmitter.

The cargo lamp will automatically turn off after 20 seconds.

To turn off: Lock the doors with the key, the power door lock switch or the wireless remote control transmitter.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

By opening and closing the doors

To turn on: Open any of the doors.

To turn off: Close all the doors:

• When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the cargo lamp will go off immediately.
• When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position or the key is removed, the cargo lamp will automatically go off after 20 seconds.

CARGO LAMP AUTOMATIC POWER-OFF FUNCTION

To prevent the battery being discharged, the cargo lamp will automatically go off when the lamp remains on for 30 minutes or more.

Windshield wipers and washer (intermittent type)

To turn on the windshield wipers, move the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the "ON" position.

Lever position Speed setting
Position 1 Intermittent
Position 2 Slow
Position 3 Fast

The "INT TIME" band lets you adjust the wiping time interval when the wiper lever is in the intermittent position (position 1). Twist the band upward to Increase the time between sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever toward you and release it.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see "Adding washer fluid" in Section 7-3. In freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield, which can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch the glass.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Windshield wipers and washer (mist type)

To turn on the windshield wipers, move the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the "ON" position.

Lever position Speed setting
Position 1 Slow
Position 2 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield, push the lever up and release it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever toward you and release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid, see "Adding washer fluid" in Section 7-3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield, which can block your vision.

Outside rear view mirror heaters

To defog or defrost the outside rear view mirrors, push the switch.

The key must be in the "ON" position.

The heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the mirror heaters are operating.

Push the switch once again to turn the mirror heaters off.

The system will automatically shut off after the mirror heaters have operated about 15 minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off when the mirror surfaces are clear. Leaving the mirror heaters on for a long time could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop-and-go driving. The mirror heaters are not designed for drying rain water or for melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de-icer before operating the switch.

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

Diagram showing a directional arrow pointing to a circular object on a curved surface, with no visible text or symbols.

To defog or defrost the rear window, push the switch with the rear window closed.

The key must be in the "ON" position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window will quickly clear the surface. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.

Heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will also quickly clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the defogger off.

The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15 minutes.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the defoggers on for a long time could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop-and-go driving. The defoggers are not designed for drying rain water or for melting snow.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 148

Engine coolant temperature gauge 148

Oil pressure gauge 149

Voltmeter 150

Tachometer 150

Odometer and two trip meters 151

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 152

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Fuel gauge

With tachometer

Without tachometer

The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of the fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at "F" Nearly empty—Needle at "E"

It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.

This fuel gauge has a non-return type needle which remains at the last indicated position when the ignition switch is turned off.

If the fuel level approaches "E" or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

With tachometer

Without tachometer

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone, your engine is too hot. If your vehicle overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:

●Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
- Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
- Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop-and-go traffic.
●Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range.
◆Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See "If your vehicle overheats" in Section 4.

Oil pressure gauge

The oil pressure gauge indicates engine oil pressure when the ignition switch is on. Check it while driving to make sure that the needle is in the proper range.

If the oil pressure should stay below the normal range, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

Oil pressure may not build up when the oil level is too low. The oil pressure gauge is not designed to indicate oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the oil pressure below the normal range until the cause is fixed—it may ruin the engine.

Voltmeter Tachometer

The voltmeter tells whether the battery is charged or discharged. Check it while the engine is running—the needle should always indicate as shown above. If the needle reads below or above the normal range while the engine is running, it indicates the charging system needs immediate repair. However, it is normal for the needle to drop below the normal range during engine starting.

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to select correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over-revving. Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Odometer and two trip meters

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different distances independently driven since the last time each trip meter was set to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. All trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

1. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two trip meters to zero, and also change the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly push and release the knob. The meter display changes in the order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B, then back to the odometer each time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push and hold the knob until the meter is set to zero. The same process can be applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(a)	[2564](indicator and buzzet)	If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.": For vehicles with the vehicle stability control system only
(b)	(Indicator and buzzer)	Fasten driver's seat belt.
(c)	PASSENGER	Fasten front passenger's seat belt.
(d)		Stop and check.
(e)		Stop and check.
(f)	[ATTK]	Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(g)	[48X2]	Fill up tank.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(h)	ABS or [DS65]	Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(i)		Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(j)		Close all doors.
(k)		Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.
(l)		Shift front drive control lever out of “N”.
(m)	[40Y2]	Stop and check.
(n)	[20GT]	Add washer fluid.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.
(o)	Key reminder buzzer	Remove key.
(p)	Four-wheel drive system warning buzzer	Shift the transfer mode correctly.

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

- When the parking brake is applied... With the vehicle stability control system— This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position even after the parking brake is released.

- When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.

- When the hydraulic brake booster fails (with the vehicle stability control system)...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer in the following cases:

- The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

With the vehicle stability control system—

●The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

Without the vehicle stability control system—

If the light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. In this case, the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.

With the vehicle stability control system—

If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

●The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.

●The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light. In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.

●The brake system warning light remains on together with the "ABS" warning light. In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

With the vehicle stability control system—

Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

●The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
●Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
- You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

(b) Driver's Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver's seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to "ON" or "START", the reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light keeps flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front Passenger's Seat Belt Reminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger's seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to "ON" or "START", the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built-in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to keep flashing.

This light warns that the battery is being discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, there is a problem somewhere in the charging system.

The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on—even for one block. It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings.

●Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

- Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp will not go off even after the several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...

●There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

5VZ-FE engine—

If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down to about the middle position, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

2UZ-FE engine—

If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota dealer to check your vehicle's emission control system and OBD (On-Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see "Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs" in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

(h) "ABS" Warning Light

Vehicles without vehicle stability control system—

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. If the anti-lock brake system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

●The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or the light remains on.
●The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

Vehicles with vehicle stability control system—

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

●Anti-lock brake system
●Brake assist system
●Traction control system
●"AUTO LSD" system
●Vehicle stability control system

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate, so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

• The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or remains on.
  ●The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the "ABS" warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:

●The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
●Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

(i) "VSC TRAC" Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

●Vehicle stability control system

●Traction control system
●"AUTO LSD" system

The light will come on when the ignition key turned to "ON", and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

There is no problem when the "VSC TRAC" warning light comes on when the brake actuator temperature becomes high.

If the light comes on while driving, the above mentioned systems do not work. However, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

●The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to "ON"
●The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light comes on while driving.

(j) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. After about 6 seconds, the light will go off. This means the system of the airbag and front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

●The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or the light remains on.

●The light comes on or flashes while driving.

(I) Unengaged "Park" Warning Light (with automatic transmission and front drive control lever)

This light warns that the transmission "Park" mechanism is not engaged. If the front drive control lever is in the "N" position while the selector lever is in the "P" position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid (p) Four-wheel Drive System Warning Temperature Warning Light Buzzer (four-wheel drive models) This bumper commands you that the transfer

This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the selector lever in "P". With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you may start the vehicle again. If the light does not go off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

This light warns that the windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at your earliest opportunity. (For instructions, see "Adding washer fluid" in Section 7-3.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the driver's door with the ignition key in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

This buzzer reminds you that the transfer mode is not selected correctly. If the buzzer sounds when you shift the transfer from "2WD" to "4HI", "4LO" to "4HI", "4HI" to "4LO", or "4LO" to "2WD" mode, follow the instructions in "Four-wheel drive system" in Section 1–7.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (except the low fuel level warning light and low windshield washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should come on.

1. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go off.

1. Turn the ignition key to "ACC".

The SRS warning light should come on. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON", but do not start the engine. All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light and SRS warning light should come on. The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:

●“ABS” warning light
●“VSC TRAC” warning light
●"AUTO LSD" indicator light

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

●"VSC OFF" indicator light (four-wheel drive models)
- Slip indicator light There may be the case that the "ABS" warning light (brake assist system warning light), "VSC TRAC" warning light and "VSC OFF" (four-wheel drive models) Indicator light stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder Indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch with steering lock 164

Automatic transmission 165

Manual transmission 169

Four-wheel drive system 171

Traction control system.... 176

"AUTO LSD" system 178

Vehicle stability control system 181

Parking brake 184

Cruise control 185

Clutch start cancel switch 187

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Ignition switch with steering lock

"START"—Starter motor on. The key will return to the "ON" position when released.

For starting lips, see Section 3.

"ON"—Engine on and all accessories on.

This is the normal driving position.

"ACC"—Accessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the "ACC" or "LOCK" position and open the driver's door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.

"LOCK"—Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the key from "ACC" to the "LOCK" position. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in the "P" position before pushing the key.

When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the "LOCK" position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the vehicle is moving, as this will lock the steering wheel and result in loss of steering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the "ON" position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the ignition could be damaged.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Automatic transmission

Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of "P" position when the brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition switch in "ON" or "ACC" position and the selector lever pulled toward you).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking

(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either third gear (with overdrive off) or fourth gear (with overdrive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch. The "O/D OFF" indicator light should come on. To turn the overdrive on again, push the switch again. The "O/D OFF" indicator light should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy and quieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the overdrive is off and restarted, the overdrive will automatically be on.

Vehicles with cruise control—When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift the transmission by pushing and releasing the overdrive switch, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see "Cruise control" in this Section.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in "How to start the engine" in Section 3. The transmission must be in "P" or "N".
2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to "D".

When the lever is in the "D" position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for better fuel economy and quieter driving. If the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even with the overdrive on.

1. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.

To use engine braking, you can downshift the transmission as follows:

• Push the overdrive switch. The "O/D OFF" indicator light will come on and the transmission will downshift to third gear.
• Shift into the "2" position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking will be enabled.

Two-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine 115 km/h (71 mph)

2UZ-FE engine

Access cab models

120 km/h (75 mph)

Double cab models

115 km/h (71 mph)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Four-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine

Front drive control lever in "H2" or "H4"

109 km/h (68 mph)

Front drive control lever in "L4" 37 km/h (23 mph)

2UZ-FE engine

Standard and access cab models "2WD" or "4HI" mode is selected 120 km/h (75 mph)

"4LO" mode is selected 41 km/h (25 mph)

Double cab models

"2WD" or "4HI" mode is selected 115 km/h (71 mph)

"4LO" mode is selected 40 km/h (25 mph)

- Shift into the "L" position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower than the following speed, and maximum engine braking will be enabled.

Two-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine 55 km/h (34 mph)

2UZ-FE engine

Access cab models

58 km/h (36 mph)

Double cab models 55 km/h (34 mph)

Four-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine

Front drive control lever in "H2" or "H4"

52 km/h (32 mph)

Front drive control lever in "L4" 10 km/h (6 mph)

2UZ-FE engine

Standard and access cab models "2WD" or "4HI" mode is selected 58 km/h (36 mph)

"4LO" mode is selected 11 km/h (7 mph)

Double cab models "2WD" or "4HI" mode is selected 55 km/h (34 mph)

"4LO" mode is selected 11 km/h (7 mph)

Vehicles with cruise control—When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift the transmission by pushing and releasing the overdrive switch, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see "Cruise control" in this Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. Abrupt shifting could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

(e) Using "2" and "L" positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine braking as described previously.

With the selector lever in "2" or "L", you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in "D".

With the selector lever in "2", the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear.

With the selector lever in "L", the transmission is engaged in first gear.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

NOTICE

◆Be careful not to over-rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:

Two-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine—

"2" 115 km/h (71 mph)....

"L" 60 km/h (37 mph).....

2UZ-FE engine—

Access cab models

"2" 120 km/h (75 mph).....

“L” 65 km/h (40 mph)....

Double cab models

"2" 115 km/h (72 mph).....

“L” 60 km/h (38 mph)....

Four-wheel drive models

5VZ-FE engine

Front control lever in "H2" or

"H4"

"2" 110 km/h (68 mph)....

"L" 60 km/h (37 mph).

Front control lever in "L4

"2" 40 km/h (25 mph).

"L" 20 km/h (12 mph).

2UZ-FE engine—

"2WD" or "4HI" mode is selected

Standard and access cab models

"2" 120 km/h (75 mph).....

"L" 65 km/h (40 mph)....

Double cab models

"2" 115 km/h (72 mph).....

"L" 60 km/h (38 mph).....

"4LO" mode is selected

"2" 45 km/h (28 mph).

“L” 25 km/h (16 mph).

Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the "2" or "L" position. This may cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, "D" position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.

(f) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the "R" position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

(g). Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down, fully depress the parking brake pedal to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down, shift the selector lever to the "P" position.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector lever into "P" position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.

(h) Good driving practice

• If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, the overdrive should be turned off. Be sure to turn the switch on immediately afterward.
• When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not use overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

Manual transmission

The shift pattern is as shown above.

Press the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, and then release it slowly. Do not rest your foot on the pedal while driving, because it will cause clutch trouble. And do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopped on an uphill grade—use the parking brake.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized and upshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance, you should upshift or downshift at the following speeds:

gear km/h (mph)

1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)
2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)
3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)
4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)

Downshift to the appropriate gear if acceleration is needed when you are cruising below the above downshifting speeds.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting too late will cause lugging, and possibly pinging. Regularly revving the engine to maximum speed in each gear will cause excessive engine wear and high fuel consumption.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear:

Two-wheel drive models

gear km/h (mph)

1 45 (28)
2 85 (53)
3 125 (78)
4 165 (112)

Four-wheel drive models

gear km/h (mph)

"H2" or "H4" "L4"

1 45 (28) 15 (9)
2 85 (53) 30 (18)
3 125 (78) 45 (28)
4 165 (103) 70 (43)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going faster than the maximum allowable speed for the next lower gear.

Good driving practice

• If it is difficult to shift into reverse, put the transmission in neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
• When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not use fifth gear.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. Abrupt shifting could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

NOTICE

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into reverse.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Four-wheel drive system—(a) Front drive control (lever type)

Use the front drive control lever to select the following transfer modes.

"H2" (high speed position, two-wheel drive): Lever at "H2"

Use this for normal driving on dry, hard-surfaced roads. This position gives greater economy, the quietest ride and least wear.

"H4" (high speed position, four-wheel drive): Lever at "H4"

Use this for normal driving on wet, icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than two-wheel drive.

“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N” No power is delivered to the wheels. The vehicle must be stopped.

"L4" (low speed position, four-wheel drive): Lever at "L4"

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use "L4" for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.

The "4WD" (four-wheel drive) indicator light comes on when the "H4", "N" or "L4" mode is selected.

See "(c) Shifting procedure (lever type)" for further instructions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in "L4" (low speed position, four wheel drive) mode

If you shift the front drive control lever to "L4" and the automatic transmission lever to "2" when you drive in steep off-road areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the "L" position of the automatic transmission lever for maximum power and traction when your wheels get stuck or when you drive down a steep incline. In the following cases, the output of the brake can be controlled by the traction control system if the engine speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).

●The front drive control lever in the "L4" position and the automatic transmission lever in the "L" position or the automatic transmission lever in the "D" or "2" with the transmission downshifting to the first gear

●The front drive control lever in the "L4" position and the automatic transmission lever in the "R" position

(As for the automatic transmission lever positions, see "Automatic transmission" in this Section.)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

(a) Front drive control (button type)

Use the "2WD/4HI" and "4LO" buttons to select the following transfer modes.

1. "2WD" (high speed position, two-wheel drive): "2WD/4HI" and "4LO" buttons left out Use this for normal driving on dry, hard-surfaced roads. This position gives greater economy, the quietest ride and least wear.

2. "4HI" (high speed position, four-wheel drive): "2WD/4HI" button pushed in

The "4HI" (high speed four-wheel drive) indicator light comes on when the "4HI" mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on wet, icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than two-wheel drive.

In this mode, the vehicle stability control system is off. (See "Vehicle stability control system" in this Section.)

1. "4LO" (low speed position, four-wheel drive): With the "2WD/4HI" button pressed in, push the "4LO" button

The "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light comes on when the "4LO" mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use "4LO" mode for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.

In this mode, the vehicle stability control system is off. (See "Vehicle stability control system" In this Section.)

See "(c) Shifting procedure (button type)" for further instructions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in "4LO" (low speed position, four wheel drive) mode

If you push the "4LO" button with the "2WD/4HI" button pressed in and shift the automatic transmission lever to "2" when you drive in steep off-road areas, the output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the "L" position of the automatic transmission lever for maximum power and traction when your wheels get stuck or when you drive down a steep incline. In the following cases, the output of the brake can be controlled by the traction control system if the engine speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).

• The transfer mode in the "4LO" mode and the automatic transmission lever in the "L" position or the automatic transmission lever in the "D" or "2" with the transmission downshifting to the first gear
• The transfer mode in the "4LO" mode and the automatic transmission lever in the "R" position

(As for the automatic transmission lever positions, see "Automatic transmission" in this Section.)

(b) A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations described in "(c) Shifting procedure".

You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 16 km (10 miles) each month. This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

(c) Shifting procedure (lever type with manual transmission)

SHIFTING BETWEEN "H2" AND "H4"

To shift from "H2" to "H4", reduce the vehicle speed to less than 80km / h (50 mph) and move the front drive control lever. If the indicator light does not come on when you shift the transfer into "H4", drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance. You need not depress the clutch pedal.

If you have trouble shifting in cold weather, reduce the vehicle speed or stop the vehicle and reshift.

To shift from "H4" to "H2", simply move the front drive control lever.

This can be done at any speed. You need not depress the clutch pedal.

If the indicator light does not go off when you shift the transfer into "H2", drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

SHIFTING BETWEEN "H4" AND "L4"

To shift from "H4" to "L4", stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 8 km/h (5 mph). With your foot off the accelerator pedal, depress the clutch pedal and move the front drive control lever.

To shift from "L4" to "H4", depress the clutch pedal and move the front drive control lever.

This can be done at any speed.

(c) Shifting procedure

(lever type with automatic transmission)

SHIFTING BETWEEN "H2" AND "H4"

To shift from "H2" to "H4", reduce the vehicle speed to less than 80 km/h (50 mph) and move the front drive control lever.

If you have trouble shifting in cold weather, reduce the vehicle speed or stop the vehicle and reshift.

To shift from "H4" to "H2", simply move the front drive control lever.

This can be done at any speed.

If the indicator light does not go off when you shift the transfer into "H2", drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

SHIFTING BETWEEN "H4" AND "L4"

To shift between "H4" and "L4", stop the vehicle and put the transmission in "N". With the brake pedal depressed, move the front drive control lever.

(c) Shifting procedure (button type)

SHIFTING BETWEEN "2WD" AND "4HI"

To shift from "2WD" to "4HI", reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph) and push in the "2WD/4HI" button.

If the "4HI" (high speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes when you push in the "2WD/4HI" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in "4HI" mode. Drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating.

If the "4HI" (high speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds when you push in the "2WD/4HI" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "4HI" mode. Stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100km / h (62 mph). Push the button to turn it off, then once again to turn it back on.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To shift from "4HI" to "2WD", push the "2WD/4HI" button again to turn it off.

This can be done at any speed.

If the "4HI" (high speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes when you push the "2WD/4HI" button again to return to "2WD" mode, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not securely in "2WD" mode. Drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

SHIFTING BETWEEN "4HI" AND "4LO"

To shift from "4HI" to "4LO", stop the vehicle and put the transmission into "N". With the brake pedal depressed, push the "4LO" button. If the "2WD/4HI" button left out, push in the "2WD/4HI" button to select the "4HI" mode.

If the "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds for 3 seconds when you push the "4LO" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "4LO" mode. Drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, put the transmission securely into "N" and push the button again.

To shift from "4LO" to "4HI", stop the vehicle and put the transmission into "N". With the brake pedal depressed, push the "4LO" button.

If the "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds for 3 seconds when you push the "4LO" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "4HI" mode. Drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, put the transmission securely into "N" and push the button again.

SHIFTING BETWEEN "2WD" AND "4LO"

To shift from "2WD" to "4LO", stop the vehicle and put the transmission into "N". With the brake pedal depressed, push the "2WD/4HI" button in to select the "4HI" mode, then push the "4LO" button.

If the "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds for 3 seconds when you push the "4LO" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "4LO" mode. Drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, put the transmission securely into "N" and push the button again.

To shift from "4LO" to "2WD", stop the vehicle and put the transmission into "N". With the brake pedal depressed, push the "2WD/4HI" switch again to turn it off.

If the "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds when you push the "2WD/4HI" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "2WD" mode. Push the "2WD/4HI" button in to return to "4LO" mode, drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, put the transmission securely into "N" and push the "2WD/4HI" button once again.

If the "4LO" (low speed four-wheel drive) indicator light flashes when you push the "2WD/4HI" button, this reminds you that the transfer mode is not in "2WD" mode. Drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

Traction control system

The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of rear wheels (two-wheel drive models) or 4 wheels (four-wheel drive models) when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to "ON", the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the rear wheels (two-wheel drive models) or 4 wheels (four-wheel drive models) cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road conditions.

Type A

Type B

Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self-check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

- The system controls the spinning of the rear wheels (two-wheel drive models) or 4 wheels (four-wheel drive models). At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.

- You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON". If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A

Type B

"VSC TRAC" warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

●Traction control system
●Vehicle stability control system
●"AUTO LSD" system

When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to "ON", the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to "ON".

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned systems such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

"AUTO LSD" system

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the "VSC TRAC" warning light will come on and the traction control system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the traction control system does not operate, it is no problem to continue driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the "VSC TRAC" warning light goes off.

If the light comes on while driving, the traction control system does not work. However, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

●The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light comes on while driving.

NOTICE

Do not use the "AUTO LSD" system in conditions other than the above. A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be required.

The "AUTO LSD" system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin.

This system is used only when wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rough surface.

This system is effective in case one of the rear wheels is spinning.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To activate the system, push the "AUTO LSD" switch under the following condition. At this time, the "AUTO LSD" indicator light will come on.

●The driving mode is set in the two-wheel drive mode (in the four-wheel drive mode, the system does not work.)
●Driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62 mph)

To cancel the system, push the "AUTO LSD" switch once again. However, cancellation of the system cannot be done while the "AUTO LSD" system is in operation.

Type A

Type B

Make sure the "AUTO LSD" indicator light comes on under the above condition when you use the "AUTO LSD" system.

The slip indicator light blinks when the system is controlling the spinning of the rear wheels.

The "AUTO LSD" and slip indicator lights come on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON". If the indicator lights does not come on when the ignition key is turned to "ON", contact your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type A

Type B

"VSC TRAC" warning light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the following.

●"AUTO LSD" system

●Traction control system
●Vehicle stability control system

When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to "ON", the warning light will come on and will go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to "ON".

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous operation of the above mentioned systems such as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the "AUTO LSD" system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the "VSC TRAC" warning light will come on and the "AUTO LSD" system temporarily stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the "AUTO LSD" system does not operate, it is no problem to continue driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the "VSC TRAC" warning light goes off.

If the light comes on while driving, the "AUTO LSD" system does not work. However, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

●The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light comes on while driving.

NOTICE

Do not drive with the "AUTO LSD" switch continuously turned on.

Vehicle stability control system

The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as anti-lock brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.

The vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the system is in the self-check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

- Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds, special care should be taken while driving.

- Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Toyota dealer. (See "Checking and replacing tires" in Section 7-2.)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type A

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to "ON". If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Lever type

Type B

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Button type

Four-wheel drive models only—

Shifting the driving mode into the four-wheel drive mode automatically turns the vehicle stability control system off. At this time, the "VSC OFF" indicator comes on.

"VSC OFF" indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the Ignition key is turned to "ON". It will come on again when you shift the driving mode into the four-wheel drive mode.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

●The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The indicator light remains on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The indicator light comes on when the system is on while driving.

Type A

Type B

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

"VSC TRAC" warning light

This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in the following.

●Vehicle stability control system

●Traction control system
●"AUTO LSD" system

The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to "ON", and will go off after about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to "ON". It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle stability control system does not work. However, as the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer:

●The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to "ON"
●The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to "ON".
●The warning light comes on while driving.

Parking brake

Pedal type

Lever type

When parking, firmly apply the parking brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

Pedal type—

To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake pedal once again.

Lever type—

To set: Pull out on the lever. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while setting the parking brake.

To release: Press the lock release button (1), turn the lever (2), then push it in (3).

To remind you that the parking brake is set, the parking brake reminder light in the instrument panel remains on until you release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

Cruise control

The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained up or down grades within the limits of engine performance, although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down the grades. On steeper hills, a greater speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

●To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads.
- Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down.

To operate the cruise control, press the "ON-OFF" button. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument panel shows that you can now set the vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Another press will turn the system completely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the "ON-OFF" button off when not using the cruise control

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

On vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in "D" before you set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed, push the lever down in the “- SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down for a slower speed. Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example, when passing—depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release it, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration.

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the "CANCEL" direction and releasing it
b. Depressing the brake pedal
c. Depressing the clutch pedal (manual transmission)

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will automatically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancels out other than for the above cases, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the "+ RES" direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the lever down in the "- SET" direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “- SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held down, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the lever down in the “- SET” direction.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, even if you turn off the overdrive switch with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or by depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal, pushing the lever up in the "+ RES" direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the "CRUISE" indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the cruise control, press the "ON-OFF" button to turn the system off and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system.

●The indicator light does not come on.
●The indicator light flashes again.
●The indicator light goes out after it comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

Clutch start cancel switch

To crank the engine without depressing the clutch pedal, push the switch with the ignition on.

The switch stays on as long as the ignition is on. And it will automatically turn off when the ignition is off. An indicator light will illuminate to indicate the system is operating.

This switch cancels the clutch start system, which is designed to keep the starter motor from operating if the clutch pedal is not depressed all the way down.

The switch allows the vehicle to be driven out of difficult situations by cranking the engine with the clutch engaged.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Never use the switch for normal engine starting. Be sure to follow the starting procedure instructed in "How to start the engine" in Section 3.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Car audio system

Reference 190

Using your audio system 191

Audio remote controls 212

Rear seat audio system 214

Rear seat entertainment system 223

Car audio/video system operating hints 270

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Reference

Type 1: AM-FM radio/compact disc player (with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM-FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact disc changer controller)

Type 3: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player with changer

Using your audio system—Some basics

This section describes some of the basic features on Toyota audio systems. Some information may not pertain to your system.

Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push "PWR·VOL" to turn the audio system on and off.

Push "AM", "FM", "FM1", "FM2", "TAPE", "DISC" or "LOAD" to turn on that function without pushing "PWR-VOL". To turn on the cassette or compact disc player, a cassette or compact disc must be loaded in the player.

You can turn on each player by inserting a cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejecting the cassette tape or compact disc. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape or compact disc. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push "AM", "FM", "FM1", "FM2", "TAPE", "DISC" or "LOAD" if the system is already on but you want to switch from one function to another.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system's tone and balance controls, see the description of your own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove an antenna, carefully turn it counterclockwise.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player and do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot, or the tape player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1 and type 2)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in with the label side up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label side is down.) The player will play from track 1 through the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Type 1

Your compact disc player does not need an adaptor to play compact disc singles. Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in diameter-smaller than standard discs.

After you eject a compact disc single, do not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc until "DISC" disappears from the display.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compact disc singles—it could cause tracking errors or interfere with the ejection of compact discs.

Type 2—

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH CHANGER (type 3)

When you insert a disc, push the "LOAD" button and gently push the disc in with the label side up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label side is down.) This compact disc player can store up to six discs. The player will play from track 1 through the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 of the next disc. The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

◆Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to the compact disc auto changer. Insert only one compact disc into slot at a time.

◆Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Controls and features

▶Type 1

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See "TUNE" or "SEEK".) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beep—this will set the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show "AM", "FM1" or "FM2" when you push "AM", "FM1" or "FM2" button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to eject a compact disc.

◀◀/▶▶ (Reverse/Fast-forward button)

Push and hold "▶▶" (preset button 6) or "◀◀" (preset button 5) to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

AM

Push the "AM" button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. "AM" will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)

Each time you push the "AUDIO CONTROL" knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the "DISC" button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

If a DVD disc or CD has already been set in the DVD player, the current mode can be changed to DVD mode by pushing the "DISC" button. "AUX" will appear on the display when the DVD disc or CD is played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the following error messages.

"WAIT": The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

"ERROR 1": The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up-side down). Clean the disc and re-insert it.

"NO DISC": The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

"ERROR 3": There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

"ERROR 4": Over-current. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

"CD OPEN": The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

∨ DISC ∧

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push "∨" (preset button 3) or "∧" (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the "FM1" or "FM2" button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. "FM1" or "FM2" will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

PWR-VOL (Power and Volume)

Push "PWR·VOL" to turn the audio system on and off. Turn "PWR·VOL" to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order:

Quickly push and release "RAND" (preset button 1). " _RAND," will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order:

Push and hold "RAND" (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. "RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

There are two repeat features—You can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release "RPT" (preset button 2) while the track is playing. "____RPT" will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—Repeating a disc:

Push and hold "RPT" (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. "L(RPT)" will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine:

Push the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan the first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can be changed by pushing the "^" or "∨" side of the "SEEK/TRACK" button.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. "ST" appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

TEXT

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the "TEXT" button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, "NO TITLE" will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the "TUNE" knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶Type 2

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See "TUNE" or "SEEK".) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beep—this will set the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two FM stations for each button. (The display will show "AM", "FM1" or "FM2" when you push "AM" or "FM" button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button to eject a cassette. Push the compact disc eject button to eject a compact disc.

◀▶ (Program)

Push “◀▶” (preset button 4) to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected (“▲” indicates the top side, ▼ indicates the bottom side).

Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

◀◀/▶▶ (Reverse/Fast-forward button) Cassette player

Push "▶▶" (preset button 6) to fast-forward a cassette tape. "FF" will appear on the display. Push "◀◀" (preset button 5) to rewind a tape. "REW" will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast-forwarding, push "▶▶" or "TAPE" button. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push "◀◀" or "TAPE" button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast-forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the auto-reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “◀◀(preset button 6) or “◀◀◀ (preset button 5) to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

AM

Push the "AM" button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. "AM" will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)

Each time you push the "AUDIO CONTROL" knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

MID (access cab models): Adjusts mid-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the "DISC" button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

If a DVD disc or CD has already been set in the DVD player, the current mode can be changed to DVD mode by pushing the "DISC" button. "AUX" will appear on the display when the DVD disc or CD is played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following error messages.

"WAIT": The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

"ERROR 1": The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up-side down). Clean the disc and re-insert it.

"NO DISC": The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

"ERROR 3": There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

"ERROR 4": Over-current. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

"CD OPEN": The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

V DISC ∧

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc you want to listen to.

Push “∨” (preset button 3) or “∧” (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

Dolby ^® B NR ^®

If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby® B Noise Reduction, push "☐" (preset button 3). "☐will appear on the display. Push the button again to turn off Dolby® B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on or off according to the mode used to record the tape.

^* : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation, "DOLBY" and the double D symbol Dare trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FM

Push the "FM" button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. "FM1" or "FM2" will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push "PWR-VOL" to turn the audio system on and off. Turn "PWR-VOL" to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order:

Quickly push and release "RAND" (preset button 1). "RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order:

Push and hold "RAND" (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. "RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push "RPT" (preset button 2) while the track is playing. "RPT" will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release "RPT" (preset button 2) while the track is playing. "☐ RPT" will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold "RPT" (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. "RPT" will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine:

Push the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan the first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player has scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken word, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push “^” or “V” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can be changed by pushing the “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. "ST" appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

TAPE

Push the "TAPE" button to play a cassette tape.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TEXT

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the "TEXT" button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, "NO TITLE" will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the "TUNE" knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶Type 3

Details of specific buttons, controls and features are described in the alphabetical list that follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in the desired station. (See "TUNE" or "SEEK".) Push and hold down the button until you hear a beep—this will set the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttons when you turn on the RDS. (See "RDS" button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the button for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM and RDS stations for each button. (The display will show "AM", "FM1", "FM2" or "FM TYPE" when you push "AM" or "FM" button.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or all compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push and release the compact disc eject button. To eject a specific disc, push "∨" (preset button 3) or "^" (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to eject is displayed. Push and release the eject button.

To eject all discs at a time, press and hold the eject button until you hear a beep. The last compact disc played before pushing the button will be ejected first. If the ejected disc is not removed for a long time, the eject function will be cancelled.

◀▶ (Program)

Push “◀▶” (preset button 4) to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected (“▲” indicates the top side, ▼ indicates the bottom side).

Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

◀◀/▶▶ (Reverse/Fast-forward button)

Cassette player

Push "▶▶" (preset button 6) to fast-forward a cassette tape. "FF" will appear on the display. Push "◀◀" (preset button 5) to rewind a tape. "REW" will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast-forwarding, push "▶▶" or "TAPE" button. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push "◀◀" or "TAPE" button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast-forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the auto-reverse feature.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Compact disc player

Push and hold "▶▶" (preset button 6) or "◀◀" (preset button 5) to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

AM

Push the "AM" button to turn on the radio and select the AM band. "AM" will appear on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)

Each time you push the "AUDIO CONTROL" knob, the mode changes. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high-pitched tones. The display ranges from -5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. The display ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. The display ranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the "DISC" button to play a compact disc.

When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

If a DVD disc or CD has already been set in the DVD player, the current mode can be changed to DVD mode by pushing the "DISC" button. "AUX" will appear on the display when the DVD disc or CD is played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following error messages.

"WAIT": The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

"ERROR 1": The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up-side down). Clean the disc and re-insert it.

"NO DISC": The compact disc changer of separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

"ERROR 3": There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.

"ERROR 4": Over-current. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

"CD OPEN": The compact disc changer lid of separate unit is open. Close the compact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

V DISC ∧

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push "∨" (preset button 3) or "∧" (preset button 4) until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

Dolby®BONR

If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby® B Noise Reduction, push "☐" (preset button 3). "☐will appear on the display. Push the button again to turn off Dolby® B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on or off according to the mode used to record the tape.

^* : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation, "DOLBY" and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FM

Push the "FM" button to turn on the radio and select the FM band. "FM1", "FM2" or "FM TYPE" will appear on the display. This system allows you to set twelve FM and six RDS stations, three for each of the preset button. If the RDS is off or RDS stations are not preset to the preset buttons, "FM TYPE" will not appear on the display.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact discs in the compact disc player. This player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly push and release the button, then insert a compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and hold the button (until you hear a beep when the audio system is on), then insert the first compact disc. After the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again so the next disc can be inserted. The same process can be applied for loading the rest of the discs. If the player is full of discs, "DISC FULL" will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter will close after 15 seconds.

PWR-VOL (Power and Volume)

Push "PWR·VOL" to turn the audio system on and off. Turn "PWR·VOL" to adjust the volume.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data System (RDS). RDS station providing good reception is automatically selected if current reception worsens.

The "RDS" button turns the RDS on and off. This button is operational except in AM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold this button until you hear a beep and "RDS" will appear on the display. At this time, the radio starts to search the RDS stations and "RDS SEARCH" will flash on the display.

Quickly push and release this button when the RDS turns on, the radio starts to search the RDS stations and "RDS SEARCH" will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found, "FOUND" and the number of the RDS stations will appear on the display, and you will hear two beeps. The stations will be preset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, "NO RDS ST" will appear on the display and you will hear a beep, and the display returns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button until you hear a beep again.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you can either listen to the tracks on one compact disc in random order, or listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random order:

Quickly push and release "RAND" (preset button 1). "RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in random order:

Push and hold "RAND" (preset button 1) until you hear a beep. "RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push "RPT" (preset button 2) while the track is playing. "RPT" will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Repeating a track: Quickly push and release "RPT" (preset button 2) while the track is playing. "☐RPT" will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold "RPT" (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. "RPT" will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on a band or scan only the preset stations for that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. The radio will find the next station up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again to the next station. To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or scan the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the "SCAN" button. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs in the magazine:

Push the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the player will scan the first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the auto changer has scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and plays the next station up or down the station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and release “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find the station after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down to locate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken word, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a different track.

Push “^” or “V” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the down side of the button one time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—

While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can be changed by pushing the “^” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. "ST" appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

TAPE

Push the "TAPE" button to play a cassette tape.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDS mode.

When an RDS radio station transmits a text message, "TEXT" will be displayed. At this time, push the "TEXT" button to view the text message. The message display will be canceled if any button that affects the display is pushed. To view the message again, push this button again. After the entire message has been displayed, the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory to store three 64-character messages. To store a message in memory, push and hold the "TEXT" button until you hear a beep.

If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the "TEXT" button momentarily. This will display the most recent message. Each push of the button will display messages in the order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if there are no more messages to be recalled, "NO MESSAGE" will appear on the display, and the message display will be canceled.

The message display will be canceled if you activate any function that affects the display.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display for the compact disc that contains text data.

To change the display, quickly push and release the "TEXT" button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes in the order from the elapsed time to disc title to track title, then back to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact disc that does not contain text data is playing, "NO TITLE" will appear on the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not appear on the display, push and hold the button until you hear a beep. The rest of the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement (TA) feature on and off. This button is operational only in FM mode.

By pushing the "TRAF" button, "TRAF SEEK" will flash on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station.

When a traffic program station is found, "TRAF" will be displayed and you will hear a beep.

After the traffic announcement program is over, the display returns to the previous mode.

If no traffic program station is found, "NO TRAF INFO" appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, push this button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the "TUNE" knob clockwise to step up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the "TYPE" button while receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the program type changes as in the following:

●ROCK
●EASY LIS (Easy listening)
●CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
●R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
●INFORM (Information)
- RELIGION
●MISC (Miscellaneous)
●ALERT (Emergency message)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

Some parts of the audio system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls, and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch
2. "∧V" switch
3. "MODE" switch

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. Volume control switch

Push "+" to increase the volume. The volume continues to increase while the switch is being pushed.

Push “-” to decrease the volume. The volume continues to decrease while the switch is being pushed.

2. "∧∨" switch

Radio

This switch has the following features— To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “^” or “∨” side of the switch. Do this again to select the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “^” or “∨” side of the switch until you hear a beep. Do this again to find the next station. If you push the switch on either side during the seek mode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features— To skip to a different track in either direction:

Quickly push and release the “^” or “∨” side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch until the track you want to listen to is set. If you push the switch ten times, the skip function will turn off. (You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracks you want to rewind, remember to count the current track as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two tracks before the song you are listening to, push the "∨" side of the switch three times.

If you push the track switch further than you wanted to, push the other side of the switch. The track number will be increased or reduced.

The track number you select is not valid if it is higher than the number of the tracks remaining on the current side of the cassette.

• When the tape reaches to the beginning, the player will automatically start playing that side.
  ●After the tape reaches to the end, the player will automatically reverse and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between tracks for the track switch to work correctly. In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

To fast-forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “^” side of the switch to fast-forward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on the display. Push and hold the “V” side of the switch to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast-forwarding, push the “∧” side of the switch. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push the “∨” side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast-forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the auto-reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “^” or “∨” side of the switch until the track you want to listen to is set. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, push the “∨” side of the switch once, quickly.

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “^” or “∨” side of the switch until the disc you want to listen to is set.

3. "MODE" switch

Push "MODE" switch to select an audio mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use.

To turn the audio system on, push the "MODE" switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and hold the "MODE" switch until the system turns off.

Rear seat audio system—

The rear seat audio system is designed for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the audio sound separately between the front seats and the rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turned on with the rear audio system controller even if the front audio system is off. When the front audio is turned off, the rear audio system will be turned off simultaneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all the modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape player and compact disc player with changer) with the rear seat audio system when a cassette tape and a compact disc are loaded in the front audio system.

When the same mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems at the same time, the system can be operated on the front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems at the same time, AM and FM modes cannot be changed on the rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with commercial headphone. See "—Headphone Input jacks" in this Section for details.

You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The rear seat audio system consists of following components.

1. Front audio system
2. Rear seat audio system display
3. Rear seat audio system controller
4. Headphone volume control dials
5. Headphone input jacks
6. Controller holder

—Rear seat audio system controller

The rear seat audio system can be operated with the rear seat audio system controller.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a USB cable connector with a black arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller, remove the insulating sheet.

To use the rear seat audio system controller, direct the signal output portion of the controller to the signal reception portion of the rear seat audio system display.

The rear seat audio system controller can be operated when the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

The controller does not operate properly when the signal reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight. Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and features of the controller, see "CONTROLLER FEATURES" in this Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

◆Do not drop or strongly knock the controller against hard objects.

◆Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car with a battery and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the holder when it is not in use. The holder can be hooked on the back of the driver's or front passenger's seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, stow the controller in the holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed to high temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a long time, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

graph TD
    A["DISC/CHIP/PROG"] --> B["TUNE/TRACK"]
    C["OFF"] --> D["ON SOURCE"]
    E["Source"] --> D
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. "V" and "A (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons
2. "V" and "^ (TUNE/TRACK) buttons
3. "ON/SOURCE" button
4. "OFF" button

1. "V" and "^" (DISC/CH/PROG) but- tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for the band of the front audio system. (For instructions, see "Controls and features" in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:

Push the "V" or "A" (DISC/CH/PROG) button. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band. The station frequency will appear on the display.

Cassette tape player

Push the "V" or "^" (DISC/CH/PROG) button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected. ("^" indicates the top side, "V" indicates the bottom side.)

Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player with changer

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push the "V" or "A" (DISC/CH/PROG) button until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

2. "V" and "^ (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Push the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to another frequency. If you push and hold the button, and the radio will go into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the "V" or "A" (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched one after another.

Cassette tape player

This button has the following features—

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “A” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “FF” will appear on the display to forward a tape. Push and hold the “V” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW” appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the “^” (TUNE/TRACK) button. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push the “▼” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the auto-reverse feature.

To skip up or down to locate a song or recording:

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

Push the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button. "FF 1" or "REW 1" will appear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track button until the number on the display reaches the number of tracks you want to skip. If you push the button 10 times, the skip feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track: Push the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the "V" (TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the "V" or "A" (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

3. "ON/SOURCE" button

Push "ON/SOURCE" button to turn on the rear seat audio system.

Use "ON/SOURCE" button to select an audio mode when the rear seat audio system is on. Each time you push this button, the system changes between the radio, cassette player and compact disc player.

When you change the mode, the display indicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and compact discs are not loaded in the front audio system, only a radio mode can be selected in the rear seat audio system.

If you push "ON/SOURCE" button to select the cassette tape player mode or compact disc player mode in that case, a beep sounds from front audio system and "INVALID" flashes on the screen for 6 seconds, and then the rear audio system returns to the radio mode.

If you push "ON/SOURCE" button while receiving an emergency broadcast, a beep sounds and "INVALID" appears on the screen to indicate that no button can be operated.

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, "AM" will appear on the screen.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, "FM1" or "FM2" will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a traffic announcement (TA) while the rear seat audio system is in the radio mode, "TRAF" will flash on the screen and the rear seat audio system will turn off. When the front audio receives a traffic announcement (TA), the rear seat audio system cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

"TAPE" appears on the screen while this mode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while this mode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will screen one of the four following error messages.

"WAIT": The compact disc player unit may be too hot. Allow the player to cool down.

"ERR 1": The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up-side down). Clean the disc and re-insert it.

"ERR 3": There is a problem inside the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc again

"ERR 4": Over-current. Ask your Toyota dealer to inspect.

If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

4. "OFF" button

Push "OFF" button to turn off the rear seat audio system.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.

◆Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by a Toyota dealer.

◆Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a cable connector with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Replace the battery by using the following procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the lock release button to the side.

Mechanical component diagram showing a rotating arm with a black arrow indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the discharged battery.
2. Put in a new battery with the positive (+) side up. Put in the case securely.

NOTICE

◆Make sure that the positive side of the controller battery is facing correctly.
◆Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause rust.
◆Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it may interfere with proper operation.

◆Be careful not to bend the electrode of the controller battery insertion and that dust or oil does not adhere to the transmitter case.
◆Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Headphone input jacks

Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt with arrows pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

You can enjoy the rear seat audio system with commercial headphone.

To use the headphones, connect them to the jack.

The key must be in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones, turn the knob. Turn right to increase the volume. Turn left to decrease the volume. The maximum volume depends on the type of headphones.

With some headphone generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine headphone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Rear seat entertainment system—

The rear seat entertainment system consists of the following components.

1. Front audio system
2. Rear seat entertainment system display
3. Rear seat entertainment system controller
4. DVD player
5. Headphone input jacks
6. Input terminal adapter
7. Power outlet
8. Headphone volume control dials
9. Controller holder
10. Power outlet main switch

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape player, compact disc player with changer and DVD player) on the rear seat entertainment system only if a cassette tape and a compact disc are loaded in the front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts-CD or DVD audio only when a disc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when your personal audio system is connected to the input terminal adapter on the rear console box. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with commercial headphone. See "—Headphone input jacks" in this Section for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with a wireless headphone. The wireless headphone can be used within rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone will mute. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

• Do not drive with using the headphone. Otherwise, you may be hard to hear the sound from the outside while using the headphone and may cause an accident.
  ●With DVD player:

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not increased, before you turn on the headphone.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Display

Diagram of a smartphone with an arrow indicating a process or operation, no text or symbols present.

To open the display, push the lock release button.

Diagram of a device with a monitor inside a canopy, showing internal components and an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Push down the display to the desired angle.

Diagram of a device with an arrow indicating rotation or change, no text or symbols present

To close, push up the display until you hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

NOTICE

◆The screen should be cleaned with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed by hand or wiped with a hard cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.
◆Benzene or alkaline solutions may damage the coated surface of the screen.
◆To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not turn on the rear seat entertainment system longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

—Rear seat entertainment system controller

The rear seat entertainment system can be operated with the rear seat entertainment system controller. The system cannot be operated by touching the switches on the screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the controller. It may cause an accident, fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct sunlight, high heat and high humidity. These conditions could cause the case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

Diagram of a USB cable connector with a black arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller, remove the insulating sheet.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Illustration of a remote control device emitting signal waves from a smartphone (no text or symbols)

To use the rear seat entertainment system controller, direct the signal output portion of the controller to the signal reception portion of the rear seat entertainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly when the signal reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight. Block the display from direct sunlight.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

◆Do not drop or strongly knock the controller against hard objects.
◆Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car seat, dashboard, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in the holder when it is not in use. The holder can be hooked on the back of the driver's or front passenger's seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driving, stow the controller in the holder when it is not in use.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposed to high temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a long time, otherwise the controller may be damaged.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CONTROL BUTTONS

1. "V" and "A (TUNE/TRACK) buttons These buttons operate the front audio system or select the track/chapter when the DVD player is operated.
2. "V" and "A (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons These buttons skip directly to a desired preset station, disc, track or chapter.
3. "CURSOR" button This button indicates the control switches on the screen when the DVD player is operated.
4. Joy stick This joy stick selects a control switch, mode switch on the screen or the menu for the disc.
5. "ENT" button This button inputs the selected switch or the selected menu for the disc.
6. "SOURCE" button This button turns on the rear seat entertainment system and selects the mode.
7. "DISPLAY" button This button adjusts the color, tone, contrast and brightness of the screen.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. "VIDEO" button

This button turns on the video mode when your personal audio device is connected.

1. "DVD" button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

1. "RETURN" button

This button skips to the predetermined scene for the disc when the DVD player is operated.

1. "SET UP" button

This button indicates the Initial set up screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "SEARCH" button

This button indicates the title search screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "ANGLE" button

This button selects the angle of the screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "▶▶" button

This button fast forwards a screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "▶" button

This button plays a screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "■" button

This button pauses a screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "◀◀" button

This button reverse a screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "TOP MENU" button

This button indicates the title selection screen for DVD video when the DVD player is operated.

1. "AUDIO" button

This button indicates the changing audio screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "SUB TITLE" button

This button indicates the changing sub-title screen when the DVD player is operated.

1. "MENU" button

This button indicates the menu screen for DVD video when the DVD player is operated.

1. "OFF" button

This button turns off the rear seat entertainment system.

—Turning the rear seat entertainment system on and off

To turn on the system, push the "SOURCE" button.

The screen indicates which mode can be selected. Push the "DVD" or "VIDEO" button when the connected DVD player or your personal audio machine is on. The rear seat entertainment system will be turned on.

The rear seat entertainment system can select all the modes.

When a cassette tape, a compact disc, a DVD video disc, an audio CD, a video CD, a CD text, a dts-CD or a DVD audio disc is not loaded on the front audio system or the DVD player, only the radio mode can be selected on the rear seat entertainment system.

To turn off the system, push the "OFF" button.

When the front audio system is turned off, the rear audio system and the DVD player will be turned off simultaneously.

—Front audio system operation

All the modes of the front audio system can be operated on the rear seat entertainment system.

When the same mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems simultaneously, the system can be operated on the front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the front and rear audio systems at the same time, AM and FM modes cannot be changed on the rear seat audio system.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SELECTING THE MODE

Use the joy stick to select the mode. Push the "ENT" button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected by the joy stick is colored blue. When the "ENT" button is pushed, the mode display changes to green. If the mode display is gray, it cannot be selected. The "Speaker sound" on the mode display is selected on the front audio system.

Cassette tape player and compact disc player

Radio

When you select a mode, the screen indicates which is selected.

Radio

AM mode:

When you select the AM mode, "AM" will appear on the screen.

FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, "FM1" or "FM2" will appear on the screen.

Tape mode

"TAPE" appears on the screen while this mode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while this mode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track and disc number currently being played.

graph TD
    A["DISC/CH/PROG"] --> B["TUNE/TRACK"]
    B --> C["CURSOR"]
    B --> D["ENT"]
    E["OFF"] --> F["SOURCE"]
    G["RMR"] --> H["VIPED"] --> I["DISPLAY"]
    J["R17045"] --> K["End"]

To operate the front audio system, use the following switches.

1. "V" and "^" (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations for the band of the front audio system. (For instructions, see “—Controls and features” in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations: Push the "V" or "A" (DISC/CH/PROG) button. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band. The station frequency will appear on the screen.

Cassette tape player

Push the "V" or "A" (DISC/CH/PROG) button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The screen indicates which side is currently selected. ("A" indicates the top side, "V" indicates the bottom side.)

Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape side, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side. This is true whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player with changer

Use these buttons to select a disc you want to listen to.

Push the "V" or "^" (DISC/CH/PROG) button until the number of the disc you want to listen appears on the display.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

2. "V and " / (TUNE/TRACK) buttons Radio

Push the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the "V" or "A" (TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to another frequency. If you push and hold the button, and the radio will go into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched one after another.

Cassette tape player

This button has the following features— To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the “^” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “FF” will appear on the display to forward a tape. Push and hold the “V” (TUNE/TRACK) button until “REW” appears on the display to rewind a tape.

To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the “^” (TUNE/TRACK) button. To stop the tape while it is rewinding, push the “▼” (TUNE/TRACK) button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette will play the other side of the tape using the auto-reverse feature.

To skip up or down to locate a song or recording:

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

Push the "V" or "^ (TUNE/TRACK) button. "FF 1" or "REW 1" will appear on the screen.

Next, push either side of the track button until the number on the screen reaches the number of tracks you want to skip. If you push the button 10 times, the skip feature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly a blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached, the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

This button has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track: Push the "V" or "A (TUNE/TRACK) button until the number of the track you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the "V" (TUNE/TRACK) button one time.

To fast forward or reverse:

Push and hold the "V" or "A" (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse within a compact disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
◆Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by a Toyota dealer.
◆Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations.

Diagram of a device with a connector and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Replace the battery by using the following procedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing the lock release button to the side.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating rotation or force (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the discharged battery.
2. Put in a new battery with the positive (+) side up.

Put it in the case securely.

NOTICE

◆Be sure that the positive side of the controller battery is facing correctly.
◆Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause rust.
◆Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it may interfere with proper operation.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—DVD player

◆Be careful not to bend the electrode of the controller battery insertion and that dust or oil does not adhere to the transmitter case.

◆Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Diagram showing car gear shift mechanism with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

The DVD player is set in the console box.

The DVD player can play audio CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts, dts-CDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see "Car audio/video system operating hints".

To access the DVD player, pull up the console box lid while pushing the lock release button.

The DVD player works when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the three following error messages.

If "DISC CHECK" appears on the screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If "REGION CODE ERROR" appears on the screen: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

If "DVD ERROR" appears on the screen: There is a problem inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again. If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Interior view of a car showing a rectangular device with an arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

INSERTING THE DISC To open the DVD player, push the lid backward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

Insert a disc and push the lid forward to close the DVD player.

When you insert a disc, push it in gently with the label side up.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case, "DISC CHECK" and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted, "DISC CHECK" will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for this player, see "Car audio/video system operating hints".

The player is intended for the use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Line drawing of a car interior with a door and star marker (no text or symbols)

The indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.

The player will play the track or chapter, and it will play from the beginning of the track or chapter again after it reaches the end.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted rectangular panel and two arrows pointing to the top section (no text or symbols present)

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the lid backward to open the DVD player. Push the disc eject button to eject a disc.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the console box closed while driving.

—Selecting the DVD mode

R17051

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—DVD player operation switches

To select the DVD mode, push the "DVD" button on the controller.

You can also select the DVD mode on the mode selection screen mentioned above.

The DVD player can be operated with the controller buttons directly.

1. "DVD" button
2. "MENU" button
3. "TOP MENU" button
4. "RETURN" button
5. "SET UP" button
6. "SEARCH" button
7. "ANGLE" button
8. "AUDIO" button

9. "SUB TITLE" button

10. "■", "▶", "◀◀" and "▶▶" buttons

The player can also be operated with the switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen, select the switch by the joy stick and push the "ENT" button. You cannot select the switches on the screen by touching them directly.

When the switch is selected by the joy stick, the outline of the switch changes to blue. Push the "ENT" button, and the switch will be highlighted in green.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push the "CURSOR" button on the controller.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Top page (DVD audio operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD audio operation switch)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Top page (video CD)

There are operation switches on the "Top Page" and "Second Page" screens.

To change the screen, push the "Top Page" or "Second Page" switch on the screen.

Dark textured background with a small circular white symbol in the center (no text or symbols)

If “ appears on the screen when you select a switch, it indicates that the switch cannot work.

Second page (video CD)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To turn off the switches on the screen, push the "CURSOR" button on the controller once again or push the "Hide Keys" on the screen.

—DVD player operation (DVD video/DVD audio)

NOTE: The playback condition of some DVD video discs may be determined by a DVD software producer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. So, some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual for the DVD video disc separately provided. For detailed information about DVD video discs, see “—DVD video disc information” in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, DVD audio, video CD or audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As audio will not play in this case, verify that the video tracks are playing and then activate playback.

When playback of a disc is completed: - If an audio CD is playing, the first track starts.

- If a DVD video, DVD audio or video CD is playing, playback will stop or the menu screen will be displayed.

The title/chapter number and playback time display may not appear while playing back certain DVD video discs.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level available for the DVD, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

To turn on the menu screen for the disc, push the "Top Menu" or the "Menu" switch on the screen. You can also turn on the menu screen by pushing the "MENU" or "TOP MENU" switch on the controller.

DVD audio—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc, push the "Top Menu" switch on the screen. You can also turn on the menu screen by pushing the "TOP MENU" switch on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To turn on the selecting switch, push the "♦" switch.

To select the menu for the disc, push the “◀”, “◀”, “▶” or “▼” switches on the screen. Push the “Enter” switch to select the menu for the disc.

You can also select the menu for the disc by the joy stick and the "ENT" button on the controller when the control switches are not indicated on the screen.

Push the "Shift Keys" on the screen, and the switches ("◀", "◀", "◀", "▼" Enter" and "Shift Keys" switches) will move up and down.

To turn off the switch, push the "OFF" switch on the screen. To turn on the switch again, push the "ON" switch on the screen.

To return to the previous screen, push the "Back" switch on the screen.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

OPERATING THE "1", "▶", "◀◀" AND "▶▶" SWITCHES/BUTTONS

"11" switch/button: Push this switch/button to pause the disc.

▶" switch/button: Push this switch/button to cancel the pause and return to normal playing.

◀◀" and "▶▶" switches buttons: Push and hold the ◀◀◀" or "▶▶◀" switch/button to fast forward or reverse. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, release the switch/button.

DVD video only— Push the “◀◀” or “▶▶” switch/button while pausing, the DVD video plays the slow-motion video replay or the slow-motion video replay in reverse.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push the "Return" switch. The DVD player starts playing from the beginning of the predetermined screen. You can also display the screen by pushing the "RETURN" button on the controller.

For further details of the predetermined screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

To display the searching title (DVD video) or group (DVD audio) screen, push the "Search" switch on the screen. You can also display the screen by pushing the "SEARCH" button on the controller.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

DVD video

DVD video

Select the title number by using the “-”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the “Enter” switch to enter the number. The player starts playing disc for that title number. The selected title number will appear on the screen.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the menu screen.

DVD audio—

Enter the group number by using the "-" and "+" switches. The selected group number will appear on the screen. Push the "Enter" switch. The player starts playing the disc from the entered group number.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the previous screen.

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only-

Enter the bonus group number on the searching group screen and push the "Enter" switch. The "Enter Key Code" screen will appear. To enter the number of the group you want to play, push the group number. If you enter the wrong number, push the "Clear" switch to delete the number.

Push the "Enter" switch on the screen. The player starts playing the disc from the selected bonus group number.

DVD audio

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Push the "Still Prev." or "Still Next" switch on the screen to forward or reverse the still pictures.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the "Sub Title" switch on the screen, and then the changing subtitle language screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "SUB TITLE" button on the controller.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Each time you push the "Sub Title" switch, another language stored on the disc is selected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the "Hide" switch.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear on the screen.

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVD video only)

Push the "Audio" switch on the screen and then the changing audio language screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "AUDIO" button on the controller.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Each time you push the "Audio" switch, another language stored on the disc is selected.

The selected audio language will appear on the screen.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the previous screen.

CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audio only)

Push the "Audio" switch on the screen or the "AUDIO" button on the controller and the changing audio format screen will appear.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Each time you touch the "Audio" switch, another audio format stored on the disc is selected.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the previous screen.

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the "Angle" switch on the screen, and then the changing angle screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "ANGLE" button on the controller.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

The angle can be selected for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the

"▶" mark appears on the screen. Each time you push the "Angle" switch, the angle changes. The angle number which you can select will appear on the screen. To turn off the screen, push the "Hide" switch.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the previous screen.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the "Set Up" switch on the screen, and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "SET UP" button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning of the chapter or the track.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Setup Menu 1 screen

There are initial setting switches on the "Setup Menu 1" and "Setup Menu 2" screens.

To change the screen, push the "Top Page" or "Second Page" switch on the screen.

After you change the initial setting, push the "Enter" switch. The initial setting switch will be turned off and return to the picture previously.

When the "Initial Setting" switch on "Setup Menu 2" is pushed, all menus are initialized.

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the "Audio Lang." switch on the "Setup Menu 1" and the "Select Audio Language" screens appear.

Select the language you want to hear on the screen.

To return to the "Setup Menu 1" screen, push the "Back" switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to hear, push the "Others" switch. The "Enter Audio Lang. Code" screen will appear.

Setup Menu 2 screen

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

To enter the code of the language you want to hear, push the number of the language code. For details about the language codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong number, push the "Clear" switch to delete the number.

If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the "Enter" switch is pushed, the "Incorrect Code" screen will appear. Push the language code you want to hear again.

To return to the "Select Audio Language" screen, push the "Back" switch.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE To display the "Select Subtitle Lang, push the "Subtitle Lang." switch on the "Setup Menu 1" screen.

Select the language you want to read on the screen.

To return to the "Setup Menu 1" screen, push the "Back" switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the "Others" switch. The "Enter Subtitle Lang. Code" screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language you want to read, push the number of the language code. For details about the language codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong number, push the "Clear" switch to delete the number.

Push the "Enter" switch on the screen. If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the "Enter" switch is pushed, the "Incorrect code" screen will appear. Push the language code you want to read again.

To return to the "Select Subtitle Lang," screen, push the "Back" switch on the screen.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the "Select DVD Language" screen, push the "DVD Language" switch on the "Setup Menu 1" screen.

Select the language you want to read on the screen.

If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the "Others" switch. The "Enter DVD Language Code" screen will appear. To return to the "Setup Menu 1" screen, push the "Back" switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the "Others" switch. The "Enter DVD Language Code" screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language you want to read, push the number of the language code. For details about the language codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong number, push the "Clear" switch to delete the number.

Push the "Enter" switch on the screen. If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the "Enter" switch is pushed, the "Incorrect code" screen will appear. Push the language code you want to read again.

To return to the "Select DVD Language" screen, push the "Back" switch on the screen.

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible.

Each time you push the "Angle Mark" switch on the screen, the angle mark turns on or off alternately.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by setting the viewer restrictions. You can prevent the restriction with a password. Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push the "Parental" switch on the "Setup Menu 1" screen. The "Enter Personal Code" screen will appear.

Push the number for the password and the "Enter" switch. The "Select Restriction Level" screen will appear.

If you enter a wrong number, push the "Clear" switch to delete the number.

You cannot change the setting without in-putting the password. When you forget or change the password, push the "Clear" switch ten times to initialize the password.

To return to the "Setup Menu 1" screen, push the "Back" switch.

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller the level number, the stricter the age limit. Push the "Back" switch to return to the "Setup Menu 1" screen.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Each time you push the "Display Mode" switch on the "Setup Menu 2" screen, the display mode is changed from wide mode to auto mode.

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language
1001 Japanese
0514 English
0618 French
0405 German
0920 Italian
0519 Spanish
2608 Chinese
1412 Dutch
1620 Portuguese
1922 Swedish
1821 Russian
1115 Korean
0512 Greek
0101 Afar
0102 Abkhazian
0106 Afrikaans
0113 Amharic
0118 Arabic
0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara
0126 Azerbaijani
0201 Bashklir
0205 Byelorussian
0207 Bulgarian
0208 Bihari
0209 Bislama
0214 Bengali
0215 Tibetan
0218 Breton
0301 Catalan
0315 Corsican
0319 Czech
0325 Welsh
0401 Danish
0426 Bhutani
0515 Esperanto
0520 Estonian
0521 Basque
0601 Persian
0609 Finnish

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

0610 Fiji
0615 Faroese
0625 Frisian
0701 Irish
0704 Scots-Gaelic
0712 Galician
0714 Guarani
0721 Gujarati
0801 Hausa
0809 Hlndi
0818 Croatian
0821 Hungarian
0825 Armenian
0901 Interlingua
0905 Interlingue
0911 Inupiak
0914 Indonesian
0919 Icelandic
0923 Hebrew
1009 Yiddish
1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian
1111 Kazakh
1112 Greenlandic
1113 Cambodian
1114 Kannada
1119 Kashmiri
1121 Kurdish
1125 Kirghiz
1201 Latin
1214 Lingala
1215 Laothlan
1220 Lithuanian
1222 Latvian
1307 Malagasy
1309 Maori
1311 Macedonian
1312 Malayalam
1314 Mongolian
1315 Moldavian
1318 Marathi
1319 Malay

1320 Maltese
1325 Burmese
1401 Nauru
1405 Nepali
1415 Norwegian
1503 Occitan
1513 (Afan) Oromo
1518 Oriya
1601 Punjabi
1612 Polish
1619 Pashto, Pushto
1721 Quechua
1813 Rhaeto-Romance
1814 Kirundi
1815 Romanian
1823 Kinyarwanda
1901 Sanskrit
1904 Sindhi
1907 Sangho
1908 Serbo-Croatian
1909 Sinhalese

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1911 Slovak
1912 Slovenian
1913 Samoan
1914 Shona
1915 Somali
1917 Albanian
1918 Serbian
1919 Siswati
1920 Sesotho
1921 Sundanese
1923 Swahlli
2001 Tamil
2005 Telugu
2007 Tajik
2008 Thai
2009 Tigrinya
2011 Turkmen
2012 Tagalog
2014 Setswana
2015 Tonga
2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga
2020 Talar
2023 Twi
2111 Ukrainian
2118 Urdu
2126 Uzbek
2209 Vietnamese
2215 Volapük
2315 Wolof
2408 Xhosa
2515 Yoruba
2621 Zulu

graph TD
    A["DISC/CH/PROG"] --> B["TUNE/TRACK"]
    C["CURSOR"] --> D["ENT"]
    E["OFF"] --> F["SOURCE"]
    G["R17094"] --> H["DISPLAY"]

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the "V" or "A" (TUNE/TRACK) button on the controller until the number of the chapter/track you want to select appears on the screen.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

DVD video

DVD audio

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the "DVD" button on the controller. The control screen will appear on the screen.

Details of the specific switches, controls and features are described below.

1. "PICTURE" switch

Push the "PICTURE" switch to turn off the control screen and return to the picture previously displayed.

1. "RPT" switch (DVD audio only)

Push the "RPT" switch while the track is playing. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.

1. "RAND" switch (DVD audio only)

Push the "RAND" switch. The player will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.

1. "SCAN" switch (DVD audio only)

Push the "SCAN" switch. The player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this switch again. If the player scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

5. “▲” and “▼ switches

Push and hold the "♠" or "▼" switch to fast forward or reverse a disc. When you release the switch, the DVD player will resume playing.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—DVD player operation (video CD/audio CD/CD text)

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER (video CD only)

Push the "Sel. Number" switch and then the disc menu number search screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "SEARCH" switch on the controller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the “-”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the “Enter” switch. The player starts playing the disc from the entered disc menu number. The entered disc menu number will appear on the screen.

Push the "Back" switch to return to the menu screen.

Move up and down the switches by pushing "Shift keys" on the screen.

OPERATING THE "■", "▶", "◀◀" AND "▶▶" SWITCHES

"11" switch: Push this switch to pause the disc.

▶" switch: Push this switch to cancel the pause and return to normal playing.

◀◀◀ and “▶▶” switches: Push this switch to fast forward or reverse. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the "▶▶" switch/button while pausing, the video CD plays the slow-motion video replay.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video CD only)

Push the "Return" switch to turn on the menu screen for the disc. You can also turn on the menu screen by pushing the "RETURN" button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see the manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK (video CD only)

Push the "D. Menu Next" or "D. Menu Prev." switch while the disc menu is displayed. The next or previous page will appear on the screen.

Push the "D. Menu Next" or "D. Menu Prev." switch while the player is playing video. The next or previous track will be searched and played.

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the "Main/Sub" switch to change a multiplex transmission. The mode changes from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back to Main/Sub by pushing the "Main/Sub" switch.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video CD only)

Push the "Set Up" switch on the screen and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by pushing the "SET UP" button on the controller. You can change the initial setting. (See "CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING" in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning of the chapter or the track.

Video CD

Audio CD

CD text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the "DVD" button on the controller. The control screen will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear on the screen when pushing the "DVD" button.

Details of the specific switches, controls and features are described below.

—Screen adjustment

1. "RPT" switch (audio CD and CD text) Push the "RPT" switch while the track is playing. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.

2. "RAND" switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the "RAND" switch. The player will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.

1. "SCAN" switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the "SCAN" switch. The player will scan all the tracks on the disc. To stop scanning, push this switch again. When the player has scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

1. “▲” and “▼ switches

Push the "▲" or "▼" switch to fast forward or reverse the disc. When you push the switch again, the DVD player will resume playing.

1. "PICTURE" switch (video CD only)

Push the "PICTURE" switch to turn off the control screen and return to the picture previously displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone and brightness of the screen.

Push the "DISPLAY" switch on the controller and then the "Display" screen will appear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

Each time you push the "+" or "-" switch, you can adjust the color, contrast, tone and brightness of the screen.

	+ or RED	- or GREEN
COLOR	Strengthens the red color	Strengthens the green color
CONTRAST	Strengthens the contrast	Weakens the contrast
TONE	Strengthens the tone	Weakens the tone
BRIGHTNESS	Brightens Darkens

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

After adjusting the screen, push the "OK" switch to return to the previous screen.

—Selecting the video mode

The audio machine connected to the input terminal adapter can be played in the video mode.

To select the video mode, push the "VIDEO" button on the controller. You can also select the video mode on the mode selection screen mentioned above.

—DVD video disc information

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use. If the DVD video disc is not labeled "ALL" or "1", you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, "REGION CODE ERROR" appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

NTSC	Indicates NTSC format of color TV.
	Indicates the number of audio tracks.
	Indicates the number of language subtitles.
	Indicates the number of angles.
	Indicates the screen to be selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3
	Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played.ALL: all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted "MPEG2", one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

Multi-angle feature: You can enjoy the same scene at different angles.

Multi-language feature: You can select the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For region codes, see page 266.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

"dts" is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

—Input terminal adapter

The rear entertainment system plays videos and sound when your audio system is connected to the input terminal adapter on the rear console box. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

To use the input terminal adapter, open the lid.

The input terminal adapter is composed of 3 input terminal adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter

White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the input terminal adapter lid when the input terminal adapter is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the adapter may cause electrical failure or short circuit.

—Power outlet

This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply for the audio device connected to the input terminal adapter.

The key must be in the "ON" position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the power supply. The power supply will restart automatically when you use an appliance that operates within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main switch is turned off.

NOTICE

◆To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
◆Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances even if their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate properly.

●Appliances with high initial peak wattage: cathode-ray tube type televisions, compressor-driven refrigerators, electric pumps, electric tools, etc.
●Measuring devices which process precise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.
●Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.

—Headphone input jacks

Diagram of a car interior showing a device with arrows pointing to the buttons (no text or symbols present)

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with commercial headphones.

To use the headphones, connect them to the jack.

The key must be in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To adjust the volume of the headphones, turn the knob. Turn right to increase the volume. Turn left to decrease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on the type of headphones.

With some headphones generally available in the marker, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine headphone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.

Car audio/video system operating hints

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video system operations:

◆Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.

◆Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or Compact Disc into the slot.

◆Do not put anything other than a DVD video, DVD audio, video CD, dts-CD and audio CD into the DVD player.

◆The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio—it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves. Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.

Multi-path—FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere—especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER AND TAPES

For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

●A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Use high-quality cassettes.

• Low-quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto-reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
• Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off.
• Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.
  ●Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
  ●Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER AND DISCS

●Type 2 and 3—Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
●Extremely high temperatures can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
●Bumpy roads or other vibrations may cause your compact disc player to skip.
- If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Remove the disc from the player and wait until it dries.

Compact disc player

- Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player.

Copy-protected CD

CD-R (CD-Recordable)

CD-RW (CD-Re-writable)

CD-ROM

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Audio CDs
DVD video discs
DVD audio discs
Video CDs

DVD player

- Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your DVD player.

SACD

Copy-protected CD

CD-R (CD-Recordable)

CD-RW (CD-Re-writable)

CD-ROM

DVD-R

DVD+R

DVD+RW

DVD-RW

DVD-ROM

DVD-RAM

Four metallic discs with different shapes and a prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Labeled discs

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations.

●Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.
●Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
- Remove discs from the compact disc player when you are not listening to them. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.

Hand holding a CD or DVD disc with arrows indicating rotation direction (no text or symbols)

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 1-9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Controls 276

Air flow selector settings 279

Operating tips 281

Instrument panel and rear vents 283

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Controls

1. Fan speed selector
2. Temperature selector
3. Air flow selector
4. "A/C" button (on some models)
5. Air intake selector

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to the right to increase, to the left to decrease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used for air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2. Bi-level—Air flows from both the floor vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor vents.

It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see "Instrument panel vents" in this Section.

1. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the floor/windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see "Instrument panel vents" in this Section.

Vehicles with "A/C" button—

Press the "A/C" button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

1. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the windshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake to select FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details about this, see "Instrument panel vents" in this Section.

Vehicles with "A/C" button— Press the "A/C" button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings, see "Air flow selector settings" described below.

Air intake selector

The air intake selector button is used to switch the air intake FRESH mode that draws outside air into the system and RECIRCULATED mode that recirculates the air inside vehicle.

To turn the air source to RECIRCULATED mode, press the button. The indicator will come on. To turn the air source to FRESH mode, press the button again. The indicator will go off.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

"A/C" button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the "A/C" button. The "A/C" button indicator will come on. To turn the air conditioning off, press the button again.

Vehicles with 2UZ-FE engine—If the "A/C" button indicator flashes, there is a problem in the air conditioning system and the air conditioning automatically shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Air flow selector settings

▶Standard and access cab models without rear console box

→: See "Instrument panel vents" In this Section.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

▶Standard and access cab models with rear console box

→: See "Instrument panel vents" in this Section. *: On some models

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶Double cab models

→: See "Instrument panel vents" In this Section.

Operating tips

●To cool off your Toyota after it has been parked in the hot sun, drive with the windows open for a few minutes. This vents the hot air, allowing the air conditioning to cool the interior more quickly.
●Make sure the air intake grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked (by leaves or snow, for example).
●On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.
- Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.
- On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce the amount of fogging on the windows.
- When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake selector be set to FRESH and the fan speed selector to any setting except "OFF".

- If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake selector be temporarily set to RECIRCULATE, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except "OFF"

Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Lower vent—CLOSED

Air conditioning—OFF

• For quick heating, select recirculated air for a few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been warmed.
• Press the "A/C" button on for dehumidified heating.
• Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle Interior while defrosting or defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except "OFF"

Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

- For quick cooling, move the air intake selector to recirculate for a few minutes.

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except "OFF"

Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging

The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except "OFF"

Temperature—Towards WARM (red

zone) to heat; COLD

(blue zone) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Lower vent—CLOSED

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. Vehicles with "A/C" button—

Press the "A/C" button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

- On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except "OFF"

Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Lower vent—CLOSED

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns on the defrosting function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. Vehicles with "A/C" button—

Press the "A/C" button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.

●To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow.

Instrument panel and rear vents

Side vents

Diagram of a car interior showing a directional arrow indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols present)

Rear vents (double cab models only)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Lower vent

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the instrument panel and rear vents. The instrument panel and rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.

For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the lower vent when using the "Floor", "Floor/Windshield" or "Windshield" mode.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 2

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Off-road vehicle precautions 318

Break-in period 319

Fuel 319

Fuel pump shut off system 321

Operation in foreign countries 321

Three-way catalytic converters 322

Engine exhaust cautions 323

Facts about engine oil consumption 324

Twin ground electrode spark plugs 325

Brake system 325

Brake pad wear limit indicators 331

Rear step bumper 332

StepSide bed 332

Limited-slip differential 332

Your Toyota's identification 333

Theft prevention labels 334

Suspension and chassis 334

Tire information 335

Vehicle load limits 343

Cargo and luggage 344

Types of tires 346

Off-road vehicle precautions

Line drawing of two pickup trucks in a row (no text or symbols)

This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, it has a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
- Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle's center of gravity.
●Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

• When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.
• Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

Break-in period Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:

• Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
  ●Avoid racing the engine.
  ●Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
• Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow.
• Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un- leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix-ups, your Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet specifications of ASTM D4814 In the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5-M93 In Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating or research octane number lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four categories that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

◆Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
◆If driveability problems occur (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to "ACC" or "LOCK" once and start it.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane number).

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Three-way catalytic converters

Diagram of a car with a tool inserted into the engine compartment, showing motion arrows (no text or symbols)

5VZ-FE engine

Diagram of a car being tested with a tool, showing force application and motion arrows (no text or symbols)

2UZ-FE engine

The three-way catalytic converter is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three-way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:

◆Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three-way catalytic converter.
◆Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
◆Avoid racing the engine.
◆Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
◆Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.

Engine exhaust cautions

◆Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system/distributor ignition system or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three-way catalytic converter temperature.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check-up as soon as possible. Remember, your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle and its three-way catalytic converter system best.
To ensure that the three-way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

CAUTION

●Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
●Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.
- Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.
- Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.

• To allow proper operation of your vehicle's ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.
• If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open. Have the cause immediately located and corrected.
  ●Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situations with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the area.

Facts about engine oil consumption

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.

• Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.
• Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the conditions the vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high-speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles)

When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become diluted and make it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK

One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check, see "Checking the engine oil level" in Section 7-2.

Twin ground electrode spark plugs (5VZ-FE engine)

Your engine is fitted with twin ground electrode spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only twin ground electrode spark plugs for your engine performance.

Brake system

Without the vehicle stability control system

The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic system with two separate sub-systems. If either sub-system should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

With the vehicle stability control system—

This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER (without the vehicle stability control system)

The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power-assist the brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops—but no more!

CAUTION

- Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.

●Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase.

BRAKE BOOSTER (with the vehicle stability control system)

The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power-assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It is normal if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (without the vehicle stability control system) The anti-lock brake system is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti-lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti-lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.

The anti-lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti-lock brake system is in the self-check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti-lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

• You may hear the anti-lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.
• At the end of the anti-lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti-lock brake system: Although the anti-lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti-lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti-lock brake system does not provide vehicle control.

Anti-lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti-lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

• Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
  ●Driving with tire chains installed.
  ●Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
  ●Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti-lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels' turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type A

Type B

"ABS" Warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. If the anti-lock brake system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

• The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or remains on.
  ●The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with the vehicle stability control system)

The anti-lock brake system is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti-lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti-lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.

The anti-lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti-lock brake system is in the self-check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti-lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

• You may hear the anti-lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.
• At the end of the anti-lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti-lock brake system: Although the anti-lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti-lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti-lock brake system does not provide vehicle control.

Anti-lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti-lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

• Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
  ●Driving with tire chains installed.
  ●Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
  ●Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti-lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels' turning speed. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Type A

Type B

"ABS" warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system, "AUTO LSD" system, the vehicle stability control system do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

When the "ABS" warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

"VSC TRC" warning light may come on with the "ABS" warning light (brake assist system warning light) when there is a malfunction somewhere in the anti-lock brake system (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

• The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or remains on.
  ●The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the "ABS" warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:

●The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.
●Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after about a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (with the vehicle stability control system)

When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.

The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system's warning light, see "Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers" in Section 1-6.

Brake pad wear limit indicators

Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with internal flow arrows, no visible text or symbols

The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to where replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when necessary.

Rear step bumper StepSide bed Limited-slip differential

Diagram of a car air conditioner unit with control panel and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

The rear step bumper is for rear end protection and easier step-up loading.

Line drawing of a pickup truck rear view showing front wheel and side door (no text or symbols)

The side step is for easier step-up loading.

Some Toyolas are equipped with a limited-slip differential. If one of the rear wheels begins to spin, the limited-slip differential is designed to aid traction by automatically transmitting driving force to the other rear wheel. If you are not sure whether your vehicle is equipped with one, you can ask your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Your Toyota's identification—Vehicle identification number

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel, and can be seen through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

Interior view of a car showing the door panel and side door, with no visible text or symbols

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label.

—Engine number

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

5VZ-FE engine

Anatomical illustration of a human brain with a black arrow pointing to a specific region, labeled R20014 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

2UZ-FE engine

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Theft prevention labels (except for Canada)

Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Tire information— —Tire symbols

This illustration indicates typical tire symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire size” in this Section.
2. DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)—For details, see “—DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)” in this Section.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see "Uniform tire quality grading" that follows
4. The location of the tread wear indicators—For details, see "Checking and replacing tires" in Section 7-2.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias-ply tires—A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. The tire not marked with "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.

—DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

7. "TUBELESS" or "TUBE

TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

1. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure—For details, see "Checking and replacing tires" in Section 7-2.
2. Maximum cold tire inflation pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended cold tire inflation pressure, see "Tires" in Section 8.
3. Summer tire or all season tire—An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. The tire not marked with "M+S" is a summer tire. For details, see "Types of tires" in this Section.

This illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. "DOT" symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer's identification mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer's optional tire type code
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

The "DOT" symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

This illustration indicates typical tire size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial, D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inch)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10.Bead wires

11.Chafer

—Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1–1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Tire related terms

Cold tire inflation pressure	Tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked at least 3 hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight	The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight	The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight	The sum of—(a) Curb weight;(b) Accessory weight;(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight	68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that follows

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Production options weight	The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity or payload)	The rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Intended outboard sidewall	(A) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or(B) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Occupant distribution	Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that follows
Rim	A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation	The industry of manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle maximum load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Vehicle normal load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side	The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the load limits shown below.

Total load capacity (payload)

Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included when trailer towing. For the total load capacity about your vehicle, see "Payload" in Section 8.

Seating capacity:

Single cab models Total 3

Access cab models Models with bench type front seats: Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3) Models with separate front seats:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Double cab models Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose weight is supposed to be 68 kg (150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity

Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow. For the towing capacity about your vehicle, see "Towing capacity" in Section 8.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For details, see "Capacity and distribution" that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than each load limit. That may cause not only damage to the tires, but also deterioration to the steering ability and braking ability, which may cause an accident.

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution

When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle, observe the following:

• Put cargo and luggage in the rear deck when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
• Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain balance.
• For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

- To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seatbacks (access and double cab models). Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck or luggage compartment (double cab models only). It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
- Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver's field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver's control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

STEPS FOR DETERMINING CORRECT LOAD LIMIT

1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see "Trailer towing" in Section 3.

graph LR
    A["Human figures"] --> B["→"]
    B --> C["Group of people"]
    D["Cargo capacity"] --> E["Total load capacity"]
    E --> F["Z20004"]

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE

In case that 2 people with the combined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load capacity of B kg (lb.), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:

B kg (lb.) - A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.) From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E kg (lb.) as follows:

C kg (lb.) - D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in the number of occupants causes the excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity, see "Vehicle load limits" in this Section.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident.

Types of tires

Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

The details about how to distinguish summer tires from all season tires are described “—Tire symbols” in Section 2.

CAUTION

- Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

- Do not use tires other than the manufacturer's designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 3

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 348

How to start the engine 348

Tips for driving in various conditions 349

Off-road driving precautions 351

Winter driving tips 352

Dinghy towing 353

Trailer towing 354

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 365

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Before starting the engine

1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

How to start the engine—Cranking hold function

(2UZ-FE engine only) (a) Before cranking

Once you turn the ignition key to "START" position and release it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in "ON" position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.

If you hold the key in "START" position, the function will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Manual transmission: Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the transmission into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor until the engine is started. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
   Automatic transmission: Put the selector lever in "P". If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in "N". A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Automatic transmission only: Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off.

(b) Starting the engine

Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in "(a) Before cranking".

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air-fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows:

5VZ-FE engine—With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the ignition key to "START" position. Release it when the engine starts.

2UZ-FE engine—With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to "START" position, then release it.

Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For warming up, drive with smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls..

Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See "If your vehicle will not start" in Section 4.

NOTICE

◆5VZ-FE engine only—Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
◆Do not race a cold engine.
◆If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

Tips for driving in various conditions

●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.
- Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharp-edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.

- When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse (manual). If necessary, block the wheels.

●Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you, and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.
- Four-wheel drive models only—Toyota recommends not using four-wheel drive on dry hard-surfaced roads, because four-wheel driving will cause unnecessary noise and wear, and poor fuel economy.
- Four-wheel drive models only—In cold temperatures, noise may occur when driving in two-wheel drive before the transfer is warmed up. Therefore, first drive in four-wheel drive until the transfer is warmed up.

CAUTION

●Before driving off, make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.
- Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
- Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.
●To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly.
●Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking could cause the vehicle to spin or skid.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
• Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely.

Off-road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner's permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.

●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs

●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
• Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
  ●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
- In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
- When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.

NOTICE

◆If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil's lubricating qualities.

◆Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

◆Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

Winter driving tips

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

See "Checking the engine coolant level" In Section 7-2 for details of coolant type selection.

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% delonized water. This coolant provides protection down to about -35°C (-31°F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7-3 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather.

See Section 7-2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer—he will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de-icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing. To open a frozen lock, try heating the key before inserting it.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer's directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle's paint.

Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into "P" (automatic) or into first or reverse (manual) and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze, making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc.

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your local Toyota dealer for further details before towing.

We recommend you use a weight distributing hitch when towing to keep your vehicle level with the ground.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at highway weighing stations, building supply companies, trucking companies, junk yards, etc.

CAUTION

●The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) must never exceed the following.

5VZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models Standard cab models 2358 kg (5200 lb.) Access cab models 2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models 2268 kg (5000 lb.)

2UZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models

Access cab models

Without towing package

2494 kg (5500 lb.)

With towing package

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

2358 kg (5200 lb.)

With towing package

3176 kg (7000 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

2494 kg (5500 lb.)

With towing package

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

2358 kg (5200 lb.)

With towing package

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

2222 kg (4900 lb.)

With towing package

3039 kg (6700 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a sway control device with sufficient capacity. The combination of the gross trailer weight added to the total weight of the vehicle, occupants and vehicle cargo must never exceed a total of the following.

5VZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models 4173 kg (9200 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models 4309 kg (9500 lb.)

2UZ-FE engine

Without towing package 4536 kg (10000 lb.)

With towing package 5352 kg (11800 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

Interior view of a car showing the door panel and side door, with no visible text or symbols.

●Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

●The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. It also includes the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.

●The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

100 = 15% ( *1) or 9 to 11 %2

R30001

●The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 15% for weight distributing hitch ( ^1 ) or 9 to 11% for weight carrying hitch ( ^2 ) of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum load of the following.

Weight distributing hitch

5VZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models

Standard cab models

353 kg (780 lb.)

Access cab models

340 kg (750 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models

340 kg (750 lb.)

2UZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models

Access cab models

Without towing package

374 kg (825 lb.)

With towing package

497 kg (1095 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

353 kg (780 lb.)

With towing package

476 kg (1050 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

374 kg (825 lb.)

With towing package

497 kg (1095 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

354 kg (780 lb.)

With towing package

476 kg (1050 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

333 kg (735 lb.)

With towing package

456 kg (1005 lb.)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Weight carrying hitch

5VZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models

Standard cab models

236 kg (520 lb.)

Access cab models

227 kg (500 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models

227 kg (500 lb.)

2UZ-FE engine

Two-wheel drive models

Access cab models

Without towing package

249 kg (550 lb.)

With towing package

331 kg (730 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

236 kg (520 lb.)

With towing package

318 kg (700 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models

Standard cab models

Without towing package

249 kg (550 lb.)

With towing package

331 kg (730 lb.)

Access cab models

Without towing package

236 kg (520 lb.)

With towing package

318 kg (700 lb.)

Double cab models

Without towing package

222 kg (490 lb.)

With towing package

304 kg (670 lb.)

However, if towing with a fifth wheel trailer, the cargo load must be distributed so that the tongue load is 19 to 21% of the total trailer weight. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

HITCHES

• If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you should consult with your Toyota dealer.
• Use only a hitch recommended by the hitch manufacturer and the one which conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
  ●The hitch must be bolted securely to the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer's instructions.
  ●The hitch ball and king pin should have a light coat of grease.
  ●Toyota recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of additional damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is struck from behind. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. Also, never install a hitch which may interfere with the normal function of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating
2 Ball diameter
3 Shank length
4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct trailer ball for your application:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size. The sizes you will most likely find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class	Typical trailer ball size
IV 2 5/16 in.
II and III 2 in.
I 1 7/8 in.

1. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load rating should be printed on the top of the ball.

2. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Vehicles with 2UZ-FE engine (with towing package)—Only use a ball mount attachment specified for the Toyota Tundra.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

BUMPER TOWING

The rear bumper of your vehicle is equipped with a hole to install a trailer ball. The maximum gross trailer weight is 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) when towing with the bumper must never exceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Line drawing of a car with a broken-out vehicle and explosion effect (no text or symbols)

FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

NOTICE

When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be careful not to hit the cabin or deck by the trailer while making a sharp turn.

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

●Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
●A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CAUTION

• If the total trailer weight exceeds 453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are required.
• Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system as it would lower its braking effectiveness.
  ●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering over into another lane.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Standard and access cab models

Technical line drawing of a vehicle interior showing structural components and airflow direction (no text or symbols)

Double cab models

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING BRAKE CONTROLLER (with towing package)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller as shown. Link the connector to the trailer brake controller via the sub wire harness stored in the glove box. The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness circuit is packed together with the sub wire harness.

Be sure to position the trailer brake controller where it does not prevent the driver from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire harness be stored in the glove box when it is not in use.

TIRES

• Ensure that your vehicle's tires are properly inflated. See Section 7-2 and Section 8 for instructions.
  ●The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total trailer weight.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

4-pin connector

7-pin connector

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER LIGHTS

-Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the rear end under body. Some models are fitted with a socket for trailer lights under the rear bumper. Use either of them to connect and operate the trailer lights. However, the trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights. 7-pin connector (with towing package)—This can be also connected to the trailer brake and trailer sub battery.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

●Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

- If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance information in the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

●Relighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE-TOWING SAFETY CHECK

- Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition, and check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes.

●Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it cannot shift.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

- Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not, install the rear view mirrors required for towing purposes.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing:

●Before starting out, check operation of the lights and all vehicle-trailer connections. After driving a short distance, stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from traffic until you learn the feel.

- Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that when backing without a trailer). Also, just turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

- Because stopping distance may be increased, vehicle-to-vehicle distance should be increased when towing a trailer. For each 16km / h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, prevent excessive clutch slippage by keeping engine rpm low and not racing the engine. Always start out in first gear.

- Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn to avoid the necessity of sudden braking.

- Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than normal turning radius with your vehicle.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but gradually. Never increase speed. Steer straight ahead. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

• Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
• In order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not use fifth gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).
• Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 30°C [85°F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull off the road and stop in a safe spot. Refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in Section 4.

●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the transmission in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse (manual). Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or "P" (automatic) and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on a slope:

1. With the transmission in "P" position (automatic) or the clutch pedal depressed (manual), start the engine. (With an automatic transmission, be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.)
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake (also foot brake on automatic transmission vehicles) and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

• Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle-trailer combination usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
• Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
  ●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:

• Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel. See Section 7-2 for instructions.
• Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.
• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.
  ●Always keep the automatic transmission overdrive switch turned on. Driving with the overdrive switch off will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see "Automatic transmission" in Section 1-7.)

• Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high gear as quickly as possible.

• Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.

• Avoid engine lugging or over-revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are travelling.
• Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stop-and-go driving wastes fuel.
  ●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.
• Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch or brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

• Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

• Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

• Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
• Keep your vehicle tuned-up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 4

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 368
If your engine stalls while driving 371
If you cannot increase the engine speed 372
If your vehicle overheats 372
If you have a flat tire 373
If your vehicle becomes stuck 385
If your vehicle needs to be towed 386
If you lose your keys 392
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 392

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure given in "How to start the engine" in Section 3 and that you have sufficient fuel.

If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See "(c) Jump starting" for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle. Your vehicle may suddenly move when the engine starts, and may damage itself or cause a collision. Also the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to "ACC" or "LOCK" and try starting the engine again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See "(b) Starting a flooded engine" for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

(b) Starting a flooded engine (5VZ-FE engine)

If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to "START" with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and accelerator pedal in these positions for 15 seconds and release them. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

(b) Starting a flooded engine (2UZ-FE engine)

If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to "START" with the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and hold the key at this position for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking hold function stops cranking automatically, and you can try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

(c) Jump starting

To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

●The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the batteries. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for a few minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

1. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the booster battery.

c. Connect the clamp of the negative (black) jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) jumper cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic point of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

The recommended connecting points are shown in the following illustrations:

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Connecting point for 5VZ-FE engine

Connecting point for 2UZ-FE engine

Do not connect the cable to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

1. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
2. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable.
3. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths—they may now contain sulfuric acid.
4. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
   If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving

If your engine stalls while driving..

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to "ACC" or "LOCK", and try starting the engine again.
   If the engine will not start, see "If your vehicle will not start".

If you cannot increase the engine speed (5VZ-FE engine)

If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down to about the middle position, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If you cannot increase the engine speed (2UZ-FE engine) If your vehicle overheats

If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. You should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in "P" (automatic) or neutral (manual) and apply the parking brake. Turn off the air conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the radiator or reservoir, stop the engine. Wait until the steam subsides before opening the hood. If there is no coolant boiling over or steam, leave the engine running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is a sign of very high pressure.

1. Visually check to see if the engine drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. However, note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.

1. If the engine drive belt is broken or the coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer for assistance.
2. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and there are no obvious leaks, you may help the engine cool down more quickly by running it at about 1500 rpm for a few minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
3. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full. For the coolant type, see "Coolant type selection" In Section 7-2.

1. After the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, again check the coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the system. You should have it checked as soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If you have a flat tire—

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual).
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:

●Follow jacking instructions.
- Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.
- Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
- Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual). Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

• Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
  ●Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
• Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.
• Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
• When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.
• Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair.

—Required tools and spare tire (standard cab models)

1. Get the required tools and spare tire.

1 Jack handle
2 Wheel nut wrench
3 Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack, each of the tools and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Insert the end of the jack handle into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise.
2. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in place with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Required tools and spare tire (access and double cab models)

Access cab models

1. Get the required tools and spare tire.

1 Tool bag

2 Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack, each of the tools and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

To remove the spare tire:

1. Put a jack handle, jack handle extension and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.

1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extension
3 Jack handle

1. Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise with the handle.
2. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in place with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

—Blocking the wheel

Simple line drawing of a car with two wheels and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

CAUTION

Make sure they are securely fixed with the screw.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Removing wheel ornament

Diagram of a tape roll with an arrow pointing to a circular hole, no text or symbols present

Type A

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a patient's ear with an arrow indicating the procedure (no text or symbols present)

Type C

Mechanical diagram showing a tool interacting with a tire and wheel (no text or symbols)

Type E

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure on a car tire with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Type B

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a tool interacting with a component, no visible text or symbols

Type D

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as shown.

Type B only—To protect the wheel surface, place sufficient paper or cloth between the wheel and wrench.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Loosening wheel nuts

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a tool and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one-half turn.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

5. Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side rail Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Access and double cab models—Put a jack handle, jack handle extension and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.

1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extension
3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are each securely fixed with screws.

Diagram of a hand holding a tool with a spring, showing motion and angle (no text or symbols)

Standard cab models

Diagram of a mechanical clamp or spring mechanism with a hand and rope, no text or symbols present

Access and double cab models

1. After making sure that no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire. Standard cab models—To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double-check that it is properly positioned.

Access and double cab models—To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle extension into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with the handle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double-check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

—Changing wheels

Illustration of hands holding a circular mechanical component with a central hub (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the wheel nuts and change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

Illustration showing two hands cleaning a circular object, one with a magnified view and the other holding a cloth (no text or symbols)

Before putting on wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

Mechanical diagram showing a hand using a tool to adjust a car tire (no text or symbols visible)

1. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
   Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end inward) and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press back on the tire back and see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.

—Lowering your vehicle —Reinstalling wheel ornament

9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts.

Standard cab models—Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

Access and double cab models—Turn the jack handle extension counterclockwise with handle to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

• When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 110 N·m (11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

Diagram of a mechanical component with two arrows indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Type A

Diagram of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and arrow, no readable text or symbols present.

Type B

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a mechanical component with two circular parts and an arrow pointing to one (no text or symbols)

Type C

Mechanical diagram showing two gears inside a cylindrical housing with an arrow pointing to one (no text or symbols)

Type E

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Mechanical component diagram showing a gear-like assembly inside a circular housing, with an arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols present)

Type D

10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

1. Put the wheel ornament in position.

Type A—Align the cutout of the wheel ornament with the valve stem as shown.

1. Then firmly tap the outer edge of the wheel cap with the side or heel of your hand to snap it into place.

—After changing wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck

11. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated in Section 8. If the pressure is lower, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new one put on as soon as possible.

12. Restow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.

With a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires—

As soon after changing wheels as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque specified in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire.

With a spare tire of different wheel type from the installed tires—

As soon after changing wheels as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque specified in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire and replace the spare tire with it.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward.
If your vehicle is equipped with the "AUTO LSD" system, you can use it in this situation. (For details, see "AUTO LSD system" in Section 1-7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and back- ward if people or objects are any- where near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or ob- jects.

If your vehicle needs to be towed—

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts.

◆Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
◆Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.
◆If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— —From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

R40042
Two-wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— —From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

R40043
Four-wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “—Emergency towing” in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly.

Two-wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck From front—

●Manual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dolly under the rear wheels. If you do not use a towing dolly, release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.

●Automatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rear—Place the ignition key in the "ACC" position.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.

Do not tow with the key removed or in the "LOCK" position, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four-wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck From front—

●Manual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dolly under the rear wheels. If you do not use a towing dolly, release the parking brake, put the transmission in neutral and set the transfer in "H2" mode.

●Automatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with the rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

From rear—We recommend using a towing dolly under the front wheels. If you do not use a towing dolly, place the ignition key in the "ACC" position, put the transmission in neutral and set the transfer in "H2" (lever type) or "2WD" (button type) mode.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed or in the "LOCK" position when towing from the rear without a towing dolly. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage.

—Emergency towing (two-wheel drive models without off-road package)

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and side-mounted sensors (no text or symbols)

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to one of the emergency towing eyelets under the front of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral (manual) or "N" (automatic). The key must be in "ACC" (engine off) or "ON" (engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Emergency towing (four-wheel drive models and two-wheel drive models with off-road package)

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and side grille, showing no text or symbols

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing hook; otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake, put the transmission in neutral (manual) or "N" (automatic) and set the transfer in "H2" (lever type) or "2WD" (button type) mode. The key must be in "ACC" (engine off) or "ON" (engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

—Emergency towing hook precautions

●Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.
●Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
- Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.
- To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing hook is used to get out when your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the hook and the towing cable or chain may break, causing serious injury or damage. - If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact your Toyota dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance. - Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible. - Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

—Tips for towing a stuck vehicle

The following methods are effective to use when your vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or chain when towing.

- Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the tires.

- Place stones or wood under the tires.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

If you lose your keys

You can purchase a new key at your Toyota dealer if you can give them the key number.

See the suggestion given in "Keys" in Section 1-2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass.

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter

You can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter at your Toyota dealer.

Have the registered identification numbers of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft or an accident. Then, have the identification number of your new transmitter registered. At the same time, you must bring all of the remaining transmitters to have them registered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote control system with the new transmitter. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 5

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 394

Washing and waxing your Toyota 395

Cleaning the interior 396

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion

Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to you. Proper care of your Toyota can help ensure long-term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:

• The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard-to-reach areas under the vehicle.
  ● Chipping of paint, or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

●Road salt or dust control chemicals will accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea-coast or in areas of industrial pollution.
●High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just above the freezing point.

●Wetness or dampness to certain parts of your vehicle for an extended period of time, may cause corrosion even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
●High ambient temperatures can cause corrosion to those components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of course, necessary to keep your vehicle clean by regular washing, but to prevent corrosion, the following points should be observed:
- If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

●High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle's underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.
- Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

See "Washing and waxing your Toyota" for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle's paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.

Washing and waxing your Toyota

Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Full-size shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the shields if they are recommended for your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.

The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

●When driving in a coastal area
- When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
- When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect
- When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substances
- When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud

Hand-washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car-wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard—let the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high-pressure car wash, for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with water and check if the ornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.

1. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it.
2. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard—you might scratch the paint.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Toyota's finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car-cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if your vehicle is re-painted and placed in a high heat paint waxing booth. High temperatures could damage the bumpers.

Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming-type vinyl cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam-type shampoo to clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

◆Do not use dye or bleach on the belts—it may weaken them.

◆Do not use the belts until they become dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.

Air conditioning control panel, car audio, instrument panel, console panel, and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.

If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle's interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE

◆If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring.
◆Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
◆Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean.
◆Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.

◆The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.
◆Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.

If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Toyota, your local Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer them.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 6

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care

Maintenance requirements 400

General maintenance 401

Does your vehicle need repairing? 403

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs ..... 404

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

Maintenance requirements

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care, is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe, and economical drivings.

It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day-to-day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner's responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or a qualified technician, or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" are those required to be serviced at regular intervals.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

It is recommended that any replacement parts used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non-Toyota supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They learn to work on Toyotas before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Toyota.

What about do-it-yourself maintenance? Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 7. If you are a skilled do-it-yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the details.

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any unusual noise, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your dealer or the qualified service shop for their advice.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See Section 7-3 for additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between the "F" and "L" lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or Insects. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See Section 7-3 for additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level (5VZ-FE engine)

Check the level on the dipstick. The level should be in the "HOT" or "COLD" range depending on the fluid temperature. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level (2UZ-FE engine)

Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the "HOT" or "COLD" range depending on the fluid temperature. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immediately. (See "Engine exhaust cautions" in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. For folding-down seatback, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.

Clutch pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and that the pedal has the proper clearance. Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake (pedal type)

Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.

Parking brake (lever type)

Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.

Automatic transmission "Park" mechanism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in "P" position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including tailgate operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month. See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See Section 7-2 for additional information. When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".) See Section 7-2 for additional information.

Does your vehicle need repairing?

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip-offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

●Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
●Appreciable loss of power
●Strange engine noises
●A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
- Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
- Flat-looking tire; excessive tire squeal when cornering; uneven tire wear
●Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road
●Strange noises related to suspension movement
- Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side when braking
●Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

●Engine continually runs hot; oil pressure gauge stays low

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On-Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 7-1

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 406

Fuse locations 408

Do-it-yourself service precautions 410

Parts and tools 411

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Engine compartment overview ▶5VZ-FE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

▶2UZ-FE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block (standard and access cab models) or fuse blocks (double cab models)
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Fuse locations

Standard and access cab models Double cab models

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical housing or enclosure with internal compartments and a hand holding the base (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a vehicle electrical connector with no visible text or symbols

Diagram of a device with internal components and a separate housing (no text or symbols)

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems.

Performing do-it-yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Toyota Warranty statement for details and suggestions.

This Section gives Instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 6, there are still a number of items that must be done by a qualified technician with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do-it-yourself maintenance, see "Parts and tools".

Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe;

CAUTION

- When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belts. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)

●Right after driving, the engine compartment—the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, power steering fluid reservoir and spark plug boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids and spark plugs may also be hot.

- If the engine is hot, do not remove the radiator cap or loosen the drain plugs to prevent burning yourself.

- Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.

- Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

- Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

- Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.

●Dispose of used oil and filter only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal.

- Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

◆Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.
♦Add only "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the radiator. "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
◆If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.
◆Do not allow dirt or anything else to fall through the spark plug holes.
◆Do not pry the outer electrode of a spark plug against the center electrode.
◆Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.

◆Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission could be damaged.
Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
◆Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.
When closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Parts and tools

Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do-it-yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

●"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent

See Section 7-2 for details about engine oil selection.

Tools:

●Rag or paper towel

●Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

●"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% delonized water.

Tools:

●Funnel (only for adding coolant)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Parts (if level is low):

●SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Tools:

●Rag or paper towel
●Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

●Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II or III

Tools:

●Rag or paper towel
●Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

●Warm water
●Baking soda
•Grease
●Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

●Fuse with same amperage rating as original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

●Water

●Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Tools:

●Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

- Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original (See charts in "Replacing light bulbs" in Section 7–3.)

Tools:

●Screwdriver
●Wrench

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 7-2

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 414

Checking the engine coolant level 416

Checking the radiator and condenser 417

Checking brake fluid 418

Checking power steering fluid 419

Checking tire inflation pressure 421

Checking and replacing tires 423

Rotating tires 425

Installing snow tires and chains 426

Replacing wheels 428

Aluminum wheel precautions 428

Checking the engine oil level

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end.

If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil in small quantities at a time, checking the dlstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill between the low level and the full level on the dipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correct range, install the filler cap hand-tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): 5VZ-FE engine 1.2 (1.3, 1.1) 2UZ-FE engine 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

◆Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle components. ◆Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ◆Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is filled in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL "Energy-Conserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designations such as SL. The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W-30. "Energy-Conserving" shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel-saving capabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil".

Checking the engine coolant level

Look at the see-through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "F" and "L" lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see "Coolant type selection" described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the "L" line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the "F" line. If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system.

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology consists of the combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about -35°C (-31°F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Toyota recommends "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" which has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper usage. "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is formulated with long-life hybrid organic acid technology and has been specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Checking the radiator and condenser

If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Checking brake fluid (without vehicles stability control system)

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

To check the fluid level, simply look at the see-through reservoir. The level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear. So be sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted line. This brings the fluid to the correct level when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking.

When the brake fluid must be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

Checking brake fluid (with vehicle stability control system)

Illustration of a mechanical device with attached wires, no visible text or symbols

To check the fluid level, simply look at the see-through reservoir. The level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.
3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand. Add brake fluid up to the "MAX" line. If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

Checking power steering fluid (5VZ-FE engine)

Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (40°C—80°C or 104°F—175°F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature,

0°C—40°C or 32°F—104°F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

a. Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir tank.
b. Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and wipe the dipstick clean.

Checking power steering fluid (2UZ-FE engine)

c. Reinstall the reservoir cap.
d. Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the "COLD" range on the dipstick. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the "HOT" range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON ^II or III to bring the level within the range.
e. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (60°C—80°C or 140°F—175°F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10°C—30°C or 50°F—85°F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the "COLD" range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the "HOT" range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II or III to bring the level within the range. To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Checking tire inflation pressure

Keep your tire inflation pressures at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire inflation pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo (payload) are described in Section 8. The recommended tire inflation pressures and tire sizes are also on the tire information label.

You should check the tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the spare!

Standard and double cab models Access cab models

The following instructions for checking tire inflation pressure should be observed:

●The pressure should be checked only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of a tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
- Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
- Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The passenger and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using a graduation of the gauge.

4. In case that the tire inflation pressure is not within the prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center of the valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soap water to the valve and check the leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap. If the gauge and the air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dir or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinflation)—

• Excessive wear
  ●Uneven wear
  ●Poor handling
• Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire.
  ●Poor sealing of the tire bead
  ●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
  ●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation)—

●Poor handling
●Excessive wear
- Uneven wear
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

Checking and replacing tires

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tires tread for the tread wear indicators. If the indicators show, replace the tires. The location of the tread wear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or "Δ" marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built-in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. The lower the tread, the higher the risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater maximum load as the originally installed tires. Also, on four-wheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains.

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.

For details about the side wall of the tire and the Certification Label.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

• Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias-ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
• Do not use tires other than the manufacturer's recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
• Four-wheel drive models: Do not use tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

For vehicles with vehicle stability control system—

- Do not use tires of different brands, sizes and constructions. This may damage the drive system and prevent the vehicle stability control system from functioning correctly.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or at least both of the front or rear tires be replaced at a time as a set. See "If you have a flat tire" in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels can get out of balance with regular use and should therefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the air valve should also be replaced with a new one.

Rotating tires

graph TD
    A["Car Wheel 1"] --> B["Car Wheel 2"]
    B --> C["Car Wheel 3"]
    C --> D["Car Wheel 4"]
    D --> E["Car Wheel 5"]
    E --> F["Car Wheel 6"]
    F --> G["Car Wheel 7"]
    G --> H["Car Wheel 8"]
    H --> I["Car Wheel 9"]
    I --> J["Car Wheel 10"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

With a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Diagram of a vehicle's rear wheel assembly with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

With a spare tire of different wheel type from the installed tires

To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions.

See "If you have a flat tire" in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, or severe braking.

Installing snow tires and chains

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, on four-wheel drive models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
- Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer's recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
●Four-wheel drive models: Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when replacing.

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
  ●Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road, so always check the local regulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km (1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be scratched by the chain band, so remove the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

• Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
  ●Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
• When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur.

Replacing wheels Aluminum wheel precautions

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.●Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer's recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.●Four-wheel drive models: Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and types, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

• When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles).
• If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
• When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.
• Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.
• When balancing your wheels, use only Toyota balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
• As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 7-3

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking battery condition 430

Battery recharging precautions 431

Checking and replacing fuses 432

Adding washer fluid 433

Replacing light bulbs 433

Checking battery condition—Precautions

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.

- Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

- Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

- Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.

●Never ingest electrolyte.

●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

- Keep children away from the battery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

- If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.

• If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contact area. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
• If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary.
• If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

—Checking battery exterior

Check the battery for corroded or loose terminal connections, cracks, or loose hold-down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose, tighten their clamp nuts—but do not overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold-down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case.

NOTICE

◆Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable from the negative terminal ("-" mark) first and reinstall it last.
◆Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
◆Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it.

—Checking battery condition

Type A

Green Dark

Clear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

Z73001

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indicator color.

Indicator color		Condition
Type A Type B
Green Blue Good
Dark White	Red	Charging necessary. Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.
Clear or Light Yellow		Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Battery recharging precautions

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Checking and replacing fuses

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type C

Good Blown

R73003

Technical diagram of an engine compartment with no visible text or symbols

Standard and access cab models

Double cab models

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work, check the fuses. If any of the fuses are blown, they must be replaced.

See "Fuse locations" in Section 7-1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative component off. Pull a suspected fuse straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse. See Section 8 of this manual for the functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the pull-out tool. The location of the pull-out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has blown, try replacing the suspected fuse with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the "DOME" or "HTR" fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close as possible to the rating. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clip. It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

If any washer does not work or low windshield washer fluid level warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Toyota dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer's directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle's paint.

The following illustrations show how to gain access to the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and light switch are off. Use bulbs with the wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

●To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.

●Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the Inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Toyota dealer.

Light bulbs	Bulb No.	W Type
Headlights — 60/55 A
Front fog lights 9006 51 B
Parking/front turn signal/front side marker lights	3157NA	27/8 C
Rear turn signal lightsType A and B	3157A	27	D
Type C	—	21	D
Stop/tail/rear side marker lightsType A and B	3157	27/8	D
Type C	7443	21/5	D
Back-up lights 921	16 D
License plate lights	168 5 D
High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps	921 16 D
Interior light	—	8	E
Personal lights	—	8	E
Vanity light	—	1.5	E

Light bulbs	Bulb No.	W Type
Door courtesy lights	194	3.8 D
Glove box light	—	1.2	D
Step light	—	1.4	D

A: HB2 halogen bulbs

B: HB4 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: Double end bulbs

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Headlights

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector. Remove the rubber cover. If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

1. Release the bulb retaining spring and remove the bulb. Install a new bulb and the bulb retaining spring. To install a bulb, align the tabs of the bulb with the cutouts of the mounting hole.

1. Install the rubber cover with the "TOP PULL" mark upward, and fit it securely on the boss. Then plug in the connector.
   Make sure the rubber cover fits securely on the bulb base and the mounting body. Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Front fog lights

If either the left or right front fog lights burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog light bulbs by yourself. You may damage the vehicle.

—Parking/front turn signal/front side marker lights (standard and access cab models)

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remove and install the clip as shown in the following illustrations.

Removing clip

Installing clip

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Parking, front side marker and front turn signal lights (double cab models)

Diagram of a car interior showing a valve inserted into a door, with no visible text or symbols

Illustration showing a screwdriver and a hand holding a screw with an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver. Remove and install the clip as shown in the following illustrations.

Removing clip

Two hands holding circular objects with downward arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Installing clip

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail/rear side marker and back-up lights (type A)

Remove the bolts. a: Rear turn signal light

b: Stop/tail/rear side marker light
c: Back-up light

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail/rear side marker and back-up lights (type B)

Remove the bolts.

Diagram showing car side mirror and frontview mirror components with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail/rear side marker and back-up lights (type C)

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail/rear side marker light
c: Back-up light

Remove the bolts.

a: Back-up light
b: Rear turn signal light
c: Stop/tail/rear side marker light

Remove the bulb of the back-up light at first when removing that of the rear turn signal light.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—License plate lights

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Diagram of a car interior showing a connector with a cable and a small component, labeled R73023 (no text or symbols beyond labels)

—High mounted stoplight and cargo lamps

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a tool and screwdriver, no visible text or symbols

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Diagram of a car interior showing a plug inserted into a housing (no text or symbols present)

a: High mounted stoplight
b: Cargo lamps

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 8

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

Dimensions 444

Payload 446

Towing capacity 448

Engine 449

Fuel 449

Service specifications 449

Tires 453

Fuses 454

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Dimensions

Two-wheel drive models

mm (in.)

	Standard cab models	Access cab models		Double cab models
		Standard bed StepSide bed
Overall length	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5845 (230.1)
Overall width 1910 (75.2)		1910 (75.2)1945 (76.6) 2015 (79.3)^*4	2000 (78.7)	2015 (79.3)^*3 2025 (79.7)^*4
Overall height*5	1795 (70.7)	1790 (70.5) 1800 (70.9)^*6 or 8	1790 (70.5)	1880 (74.0) 1890 (74.4)^*7 1895 (74.6)^*8
Wheelbase 3260 (128.3)	3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3570 (140.5)
Front tread 1680 (66.1)	1680 (66.1) 1680 (66.1) 1680 (66.1)
Rear tread 1648 (64.9)	1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1710 (67.3)

*1: With steel bumper
^2 : With plastic bumper
*3: With wheel arch moulding
^4 : With over fender
^5 : Unladen vehicle
*6: With P245/70R16 tires
*7: With P265/70R16 tires
*8: With P265/65R17 tires

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Four-wheel drive models
mm (in.)

	Standard cab models	Access cab models		Double cab models
		Standard bed StepSide bed
Overall length	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5525 (217.5)^*1 5545 (218.3)^*2	5845 (230.1)
Overall width	1910 (75.2)1945 (76.6)*3	1910 (75.2)1945 (76.6)*32015 (79.3)*4	2000 (78.7)	2015 (79.3)*32025 (79.7)*4
Overall height*5	1805 (71.1)*61815 (71.5)*7 or 8	1810 (71.3)*61820 (71.7)*7 or 8	1810 (71.3)	1890 (74.4)*61900 (74.8)*71905 (75.0)*8
Wheelbase 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3260 (128.3) 3570 (140.5)
Front tread 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9) 1675 (65.9)
Rear tread 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1648 (64.9) 1710 (67.3)

*1: With steel bumper
^2 : With plastic bumper
*3: With wheel arch moulding
^4 : With over fender
^5 : Unladen vehicle
*6: With P245/70R16 tires
*7: With P265/70R16 tires
*8: With P265/65R17 tires

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Payload

U.S.A. kg (lb.)

Cab type	Engine	Driving system	Transmission type	Grade*1	Deck type	Payload *2
Standard cab models	5VZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	Manual transmission	Standard	Standard bed	714 (1575)
			Automatic transmission	Standard	Standard bed	701 (1545)
	2UZ-FE	Four-wheel drive	Automatic transmission	SR5	Standard bed	776 (1710)
Access cab models	5VZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	Manual transmission	SR5	Standard bed	699 (1540)
			Automatic transmission	SR5	Standard bed	678 (1495)
		Four-wheel drive	Manual transmission	SR5	Standard bed	710 (1565)
			Automatic transmission	SR5	Standard bed	689 (1520)
	2UZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	Automatic transmission	SR5	Standard bed 794 (1750)
					StepSide bed 687 (1515)
				Limited	Standard bed 816 (1800)
					StepSide bed 726 (1600)
		Four-wheel drive	Automatic transmission	SR5	Standard bed 669 (1475)
					StepSide bed 576 (1270)
				Limited	Standard bed 692 (1525)
					StepSide bed 601 (1325)

*1: See "Model code" on page ix in the beginning of this manual if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is.
Maximum payload including weight of driver, passengers, optional equipment and cargo

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

kg (lb.)

Cab type	Engine	Driving system	Transmission type	Grade*1	Deck type Payload *2
Double cab models	2UZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	Automatic transmission	SR5 Standard bed 851 (1875)
				Limited Standard bed 826 (1820)
		Four-wheel drive	Automatic transmission	SR5 Standard bed 742 (1635)
				Limited Standard bed 717 (1580)

Canada kg (lb.)

Cab type	Engine	Driving system	Grade*1	Payload*2
Standard cab models	5VZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	Standard	708 (1560)
	2UZ-FE	Four-wheel drive	Standard	782 (1725)
Access cab models	2UZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	SR5	787 (1735)
		Four-wheel drive	SR5	662 (1460)
			Limited	685 (1510)
Double cab models 2	JZ-FE	Two-wheel drive	SR5	844 (1860)
		Four-wheel drive	SR5	735 (1620)
			Limited	712 (1570)

*1: See "Model code" on page ix in the beginning of this manual if you are not sure of which model your vehicle is. *2.
Maximum payload including weight of driver, passengers, optional equipment and cargo

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Towing capacity
kg (lb.)

Standard cab models	5VZ-FE engine	Two-wheel drive models	Without towing package	2358 (5200)
	2UZ-FE engine	Four-wheel drive models	Without towing package 2494 (5500)
			With towing package 3311 (7300)
Access cab models	5VZ-FE engine	Two-wheel drive models	Without towing package	2268 (5000)
		Four-wheel drive models	Without towing package	2268 (5000)
	2UZ-FE engine	Two-wheel drive models	Without towing package 2494 (5500)
			With towing package 3311 (7300)
		Four-wheel drive models	Without towing package 2358 (5200)
			With towing package 3175 (7000)
Double cab models	2UZ-FE engine	Two-wheel drive models	Without towing package 2358 (5200)
			With towing package 3176 (7000)
		Four-wheel drive models	Without towing package 2222 (4900)
			With towing package 3039 (6700)

*: Trailer weight + cargo weight

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Engine Fuel

Model:

5VZ-FE and 2UZ-FE

Type:

5VZ-FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

2UZ-FE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

5VZ-FE engine

93.5 82.0 (3.68 3.23)

2UZ-FE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm³ (cu. in.):

5VZ-FE engine 3378 (206.1)

2UZ-FE engine 4664 (284.6)

Service specifications

Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity. L (gal., Imp. gal.)

100 (26.4, 22.0)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

5VZ-FE engine

Intake 0.13—0.23 (0.006—0.009)

Exhaust 0.27—0.37 (0.011—0.014)

2UZ-FE engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:

5VZ-FE engine

DENSO K16TR11

NGK BKR5EKB11

2UZ-FE engine

DENSO K20R-U

NGK BKR6EYA

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

5VZ-FE engine 1.1 (0.043)

2UZ-FE engine 0.8 (0.031)

Drive belt tension measured with Bor-

roughs drive belt tension gauge

No. BT-33-73F (used belt), lbf:

5VZ-FE engine

Generator belt 100±20

Air conditioning compressor belt

100±20

Power steering pump belt

100 +20 -15

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

5VZ-FE engine

With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)

Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

2UZ-FE engine

With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)

Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is filled in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL "Energy-Conserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W-30

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With manual transmission 10.0 (10.6, 8.8)

With automatic transmission

5VZ-FE engine 9.9 (10.5, 8.7)

2UZ-FE engine

Standard and access cab models 11.6 (12.3, 10.2)

Double cab models 11.7 (12.4, 10.3)

Coolant type:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is filled in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage ^® at 20°C (68°F):

12.6—12.8 V Fully charged

12.2—12.4 V Half charged

11.8—12.0 V Discharged

^* : Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off

Charging rates:

5 A max.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two-wheel drive models

2.6 (2.7, 2.3)

Four-wheel drive models

2.2 (2.3, 1.9)

Oil type:

Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W-90

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,

np. qt.):

Up to 2.0 (2.1, 1.8)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV

Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement". When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only "Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV" (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission fluid other than "Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV" may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1.0 (1.1, 0.9)

Oil type:

Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W-90

DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Front

1.15 (1.2, 1.0)

Rear

Standard and access cab models

Two-wheel drive models

Standard differential

3.80 (4.0, 3.3)

Limited-slip differential

3.15 (3.3, 2.8)

Four-wheel drive models

Standard differential

3.50 (3.7, 3.1)

Limited-slip differential

2.95 (3.1, 2.6)

Double cab models

Standard differential

4.00 (4.2, 3.5)

Limited-slip differential

3.35 (3.5, 2.9)

Oil type:

Standard differential

Hypoid gear oil API GL-5

Limited-slip differential

Hypoid gear oil for limited-slip differ-

ential API GL-5

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Recommended oil viscosity:

Front

SAE 75W-90

Rear

Standard differential

Synthetic oil SAE 75W-140

Limited-slip differential

Above -18^ (0°F)

SAE 90

Below -18^ ( 0^ )

SAE 80W or 80W-90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2

Double cardan joint

Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base

chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yokes

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2 or Molybdenum-disulfide lithium

base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)

with the engine running, mm (in.):

Without vehicle stability control system 95 (3.7)

With vehicle stability control system

80 (3.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment:

Pedal type—when depressed with the

force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf)

8—10 clicks

Lever type—when pulled with the force

of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)

8—12 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON®II

or III

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Tires

Tire size, pressure and cold tire inflation wheel size:

Standard and access cab models

Tire size	Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)		Wheel size
	Front Rear
P245/70R16	180 (1.8, 26)	240 (2.4, 35)	7J or 7JJ 16
P265/70R16	180 (1.8, 26)	200 (2.0, 29)	7J or 7JJ 16
P265/65R17	200 (2.0, 29)	220 (2.2, 32)	7 1/2JJ 17

Double cab models

Tire size	Tire inflation pressure kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)		Wheel size
	Front Rear
P245/70R16	220 (2.2, 32)	240 (2.4, 35)	7J or 7JJ 16
P265/70R16	200 (2.0, 29) *1220 (2.2, 32) *2	220 (2.2, 32) *1230 (2.3, 33) *2	7J or 7JJ 16
P265/65R17	200 (2.0, 29)	220 (2.2, 32)	7 1/2JJ 17

^*1 : Vehicles without off-road package
^2 : Vehicles with off-road package
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see "Checking tire inflation pressure" through "Aluminum wheel precautions" in Section 7-2.

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

110 (11.5, 83)

Fuses (standard and access cab models)

Engine compartment (2UZ-FE engine)

Engine compartment (5VZ-FE engine)

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mir-
   ror heaters
2. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
3. TOW BRK 30 A: Trailer brake control-
   ler
4. SUB BATT 30 A: Trailer sub battery
5. TOW TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail lights)
6. PWR OUTLET 1 15 A: Power outlet
7. ECU-B 5 A: Anti-lock brake system
8. H-LP RH 10 A: Right-hand headlight (high beam)

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. PWR OUTLET 2 15 A: Power outlet

2. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal lights, vanity light, ignition switch light, step light, door courtesy lights, open door warning light

3. H-LP LH 10 A : Left-hand headlight (high beam)

4. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, emission control system

5. RADIO 20 A: Audio system

6. HEAD RL 10 A (with daytime running light system): Right-hand headlight (low beam)

7. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

8. HEAD LL 10 A (with daytime running light system): Left-hand headlight (low beam)

9. ALT-S 7.5 A: Charging system

10. ETCS 10 A (2UZ-FE engine): Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system

11. HAZ 15 A: Emergency flashers

12. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, fuel pump, "EFI NO.2" fuse

13. AM2 30 A: Ignition system, starting system, "IGN" and "STA" fuses

14. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

15. ETCS 15 A (5VZ-FE engine): Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system

16. WIP 20 A: Windshield wipers and washer

17. TURN 5 A: Turn signal lights

18. ECU IG 5 A: Anti-lock brake system, cruise control system

19. 4WD 20 A: Four-wheel drive control system, A.D.D. control system

20. ACC 15 A: Cigarette lighter, audio system, SRS airbag system, power rear view mirrors, "PWR OUTLET 1" and "PWR OUTLET 2" fuses

21. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters, back-up lights, starting system, air conditioning system

22. IGN 5 A: SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, discharge warning light, ignition system

23. CARGO LP 5 A: Cargo lamp

24. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, license plate lights, instrument panel lights, parking lights, glove box light

25. OBD 7.5 A: On-board diagnosis system

26. HORN 10 A: Horns

27. STA 5 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, gauges and meters

28. STOP 15 A: Stoplights, high mounted stoplight

Fuses (type B)

1. AM1 40 A: Starting system, "ACC", "WIP", "4WD", "ECU-IG", "GAUGE" and "TURN" fuses

2. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system, "A/C" fuse

3. J/B 50 A: "POWER", "CARGO LP", "TAIL", "OBD", "HORN" and "STOP" fuses

4. ABS 2 50 A: Anti-lock brake system

5. ABS 3 30 A (without vehicle stability control system) or 50 A (with vehicle stability control system): Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system

6. ST3 30 A: Starting system, "STA" fuse

7. POWER 30 A: Power door lock system, power windows, power seat

Fuse (type C)

1. FL ALT 100 A (without towing package) or 140 A (with towing package): "AM1", "HTR", "J/B", "MIR HTR", "FOG", "TOW BRK", "SUB BATT", "TOW TAIL", "PWR OUTLET 1" and "PWR OUTLET 2" fuses

Fuses (double cab models)

Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. H-LP RH 10 A (with daytime running light system): Right-hand headlight (high beam)
2. H-LP LH 10 A (with daytime running light system): Left-hand headlight (high beam)
3. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
4. H-LP RL 10 A (with daytime running light system): Right-hand headlight (low beam)

5. H-LP LL 10 A (with daytime running light system): Left-hand headlight (low beam)

6. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat audio system,

7. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail lights)
8. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer sub battery

9. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake controller

10. CARGO LP 7.5 A: Cargo lamp

11. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

12. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse
13. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

Engine compartment

Front passenger's side cowl panel

Instrument panel

1. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system
2. EFI NO.1 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electric throttle control system
3. H-LP RH 15 A (without daytime running light system): Right-hand headlight
4. TOWING 30 A: Trailer lights (stop lights, turn signal lights)

5. ALT-S 7.5 A: Charging system

6. DRL 15 A (with daytime running light system): Daytime running light system H-LP LH 15 A (without daytime running light system): Left-hand headlight

7. AM2 25 A: Starting system
8. TURN-HAZ 20 A: Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

9. RAD NO.3 20 A: Car audio/video system

10. ST 30 A: Starting system, "STA" fuse

11. HÖRN 10 A: Horns
12. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system
13. DOME 10 A: Center interior and personal lights, personal lights, gauges and meters, clock, ignition switch light, door courtesy lights, step light, vanity lights

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. ECU-B 7.5 A: Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, security system, headlight and tail light auto cut system, illuminated entry system, daytime running light system), driver and front passenger door lock system, gauges and meters, wireless door lock system, vehicle stability control system, door courtesy lights
2. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror heaters
3. RAD NO.1 25 A: Car audio system
4. STA 7.5 A: Starting system
5. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, trailer lights (tail lights), parking lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, license plate lights
6. ECU-IG 10 A: Charging system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, electronically controlled automatic transmission system, electric moon roof, driver and front passenger door lock system, gauges and meters, multi-information display, power outlets
7. WSH 25 A: Wipers and washer

8. AC INV 15 A: Power outlets

9. IGN 2 20 A: Starting system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

10. PWR NO.3 20 A: Rear passenger's power window (right side)
11. PWR NO.4 20 A: Rear passenger's power window (left side)
12. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter
13. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Car audio/video system, rear seat audio system, rear seat entertainment system, power rear view mirror control, power outlets, multiplex communication system (power door lock system, security system, headlight and tall light auto cut system, illuminated entry system, daytime running light system), clock, shift position indicator lights
14. 4WD 20 A: A.D.D. control system, four-wheel drive system
15. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high-mounted stop lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, trailer light (stop lights), trailer brake controller, multiplex communication system

16. OBD 7.5 A: On-board diagnosis system

17. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights, glove box light, lights of seat heaters, cigarette lighter, ashtrays, multi-information display, car audio/video system, gauges and meters, air conditioning systems, power outlets

18. PWR NO.1 25 A: Driver's door lock system driver's power window
19. WIP 25 A: Wiper and washers
20. IGN 1 10 A: Charging system, SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, vehicle stability control system
21. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof
22. PWR NO.2 25 A: Front passengers' door lock system, front passenger's power window
23. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning systems, electric cooling fan, rear window defogger, outside rear view mirror heater, seat heaters
24. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

1. GAUGE 15 A: Back-up lights, gauge and meters, emergency flashers, slip indicator light, vehicle stability control system, four-wheel drive system, trailer lights (back-up lights), multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, shift position indicator lights
2. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
3. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters Fuses (type B)
4. ABS NO.1 30 A (without vehicle stability control system) or ABS NO.1 50 A (with vehicle stability control system): Anti-lock brake system
5. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system
6. DEFOG 40 A: Rear window defogger
7. MAIN 40 A: "H-LP RH", "H-LP LH" "H-LP LL" and "H-LP RL" fuses
8. DOOR NO.2 30 A: Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, security system)
9. PWR SEAT 30 A: Power front seats
10. AM1 40 A: "HTR", "CIG", "GAUGE", "RAD NO.2", "ECU-IG", "WIP", "WSH" and "4WD" fuses
11. PWR NO.5 30 A: Power rear window

Fuses (type C)

1. ALT 140 A: "DEFOG", "ABS NO.1", "CARGO LP", "HEATER", "AM1", "PWR SEAT", "TAIL", "STOP", "SUN ROOF", "PANEL", "OBD", "FOG", "PWR NO.1", "PWR NO.2", "PWR NO.5", "AC INV", "PWR NO.3", "PWR NO.4", "PWR OUTLET", "SEAT HTR", "BATT CHARGE", "TOWING BRK", and "TOWING TAIL" fuses

2. ABS NO.2 60 A: Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

SECTION 9

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS AND CAMPER INFORMATION

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and camper information

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 462

Camper information 462

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Salcs, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. arca) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

Camper information—

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Center of gravity location

Standard cab models

Access cab models (StepSide bed)

The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center of gravity zone.

Standard cab models

A: 1186 mm (46.7 in.)

B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)

Access cab models

Standard bed

A: 1186 mm (46.7 In.)

B: 1058 mm (41.7 in.)

StepSide bed

A: 1158 mm (45.6 in.)

B: 1030 mm (40.6 in.)

Double cab models

A: 1189 mm (46.8 in.)

B: 1062 mm (41.8 in.)

Access cab models (standard bed)

Double cab models

—Cargo weight rating and proper matching

CARGO WEIGHT RATING

Standard cab models

3 people, V6, 2WD, 453 kg (1000 lb.)

3 people, V8, 4WD, 476 kg (1050 lb.)

Access cab models

5 people, V6, 2WD, Manual transmission 295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V6, 2WD, Automatic transmission 204 kg (450 lb.)

5 people, V6, 4WD, Manual transmission 295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V6, 4WD, Automatic transmission 204 kg (450 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD, Standard bed 295 kg (650 lb.)

6 people, V8, 2WD, StepSide bed 204 kg (450 lb.)

6 people, V8, 4WD, Standard bed 159 kg (350 lb.)

6 people, V8, 4WD, StepSide bed 91 kg (200 lb.)

Double cab models

5 people, V8, 2WD, 385 kg (850 lb.)

5 people, V8, 4WD, 272 kg (600 lb.)

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating and the camper's center of gravity should fall within the truck's recommended center of gravity zone when installed.

'04 TUNDRA\_U (L/O 0309)

—Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle Certification Label which is located on the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. See "Your Toyota's identification" in Section 2 for the Certification Label location. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

GAWR

Front 1588 kg (3500 lb.)

Rear

Standard and access cab models P245/70R16 tires

1706 kg (3760 lb.) P265/70R16 or P265/65R17 tires 1796 kg (3960 lb.)

Double cab models 1706 kg (3760 lb.)

GVWR

Two-wheel drive models

Standard cab models 2494 kg (5500 lb.)

Access cab models V6 2585 kg (5700 lb.)

V8 Standard bed 2812 kg (6200 lb.) StepSide bed 2726 kg (6010 lb.)

Double cab models 2993 kg (6600 lb.)

Four-wheel drive models Standard cab models 2812 kg (6200 lb.)

Access cab models V6 2721 kg (6000 lb.) V8 Standard bed 2812 kg (6200 lb.) StepSide bed 2726 kg (6010 lb.)

Double cab models 2993 kg (6600 lb.)

If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value-conscious people who drive Toyota. We are proud of the advanced engineering and quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner's Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble-free motoring. For important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

• U.S. OWNERS:

Toyota Customer Assistance Center

Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331

• CANADIAN OWNERS:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre

Toll-free: 1-888-TOYOTA-8 (1-888-869-6828)

Please leave this Owner's Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota's policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

©2003 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

sU-7

Quick index

• If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on ..... 152
• If your vehicle will not start 368
• If your engine stalls while driving 371
• If your vehicle overheats 372
• If you have a flat tire 373
• If your vehicle needs to be towed 386
• Tips for driving during break-in period 319
• How to start the engine 348
• General maintenance 401
• Complete index ...... NO TAG

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)

or higher

See page 319 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity:

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil:

API grade SL "Energy-Conserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recom-

mended.

See page 415 for detailed information.

Automatic transmission fluid

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV

See page 451 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 421 through 428.

Tire Inflation pressure: See page 453.

Publication No. OM34426U

Part No. 01999-34426

Printed in Japan 01-0309-00 B

( U )

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

00060

When you see the safety symbol shown above, it means: "Do not..."; "Do not do this"; or "Do not let this happen".

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to read Section 1-3 of this Owner's Manual carefully. In terms of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides, Section 1-3 of this Owner's Manual is the most important Section for you and your family to read.

Section 1-3 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is used properly and together with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no Injury in the event of collision. However, the more you know about these systems and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of Injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one example of how the Instructions in Section 1-3 of this Owner's Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1-3 carefully and refer to them from time to time during your time of ownership of this vehicle.

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited warranties:

• New vehicle warranty
• Emission control systems warranty
• Others

For further information, please refer to the "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Your responsibility for maintenance

It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

Important health and safety information about your Toyota

CAUTION

●WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of your Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as follows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

• Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
  • Electronic throttle control system
• SRS airbag system
• Seat belt pretensioner system
• Anti-lock brake system
• Traction control system
  • "AUTO LSD" system
  • Vehicle stability control system
• Cruise control system

Tires and loading on your Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the excess load may result in the deterioration of steering ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in this Owner's Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see "Checking tire inflation pressure" in Section 7-2 and "Vehicle load limits" in Section 2.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your vehicle.

On-pavement and off-road driving tips

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for off-road use also. It has a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read "Off-road vehicle precautions" in Section 2 and "Off-road driving precautions" in Section 3.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Model code

Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.

graph TD
    A["Engine type\nVCK: 5VZ-FE engine\nUCK: 2UZ-FE engine"] --> B["V C K 3 0 ○ - T R ○ D ○"]
    C["Cap type\nT: Standard cab\nA: Access cab\nP: Double cab"] --> B
    D["Grade\nD: Standard grade\nS: SR5 grade\nL: Limited grade"] --> B
    E["Driving system\n30, 31: Two-wheel drive\n40, 41: Four-wheel drive"] --> B
    F["Deck type\nR: Standard bed\nS: StepSide bed"] --> B

The model code appears on the Certification Label with the heading "MODEL". See "Your Toyota's Identification" in Section 2 for the Certification Label location.

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

You should know as much about the quality and importance of proper maintenance of your new vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual tells you how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to correctly perform your own maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from the moment you drive it off the showroom floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is packed with literally everything you need to know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2004 TUNDRA from Sep. '03 Prod. (OM34426U)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis, body, electrical system, and more, are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune-up

Periodic maintenance and tunc-up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the work yourself step-by-step.

Arcas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the Repair Manual

The repair manual for TOYOTA TUNDRA, written in English, may be purchased as applicable from any Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2004 TOYOTA TUNDRA Repair Manual

Pub. No.: RM1091U1 RM1091U2

2004 TUNDRA from Sep. '03 Prod. (OM34426U)

'04 TUNDRA_U (L/O 0309)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU — PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

• Comfortable
• Easy to use
• Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.